all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 737.59 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 974.55 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 66.16 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 200.91 KiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 4.68 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 2.10 MiB | ||||
1 |
|
User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 2.19 MiB | ||||
1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | External Photos | |||||||
1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 | Test Report | |||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos |
1 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 737.59 KiB |
ES-G154905 English Copyright Statement 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved. All material in this User Manual is the property of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries, and is protected under US, CANADA, MEXICO and International copyright and/or other intellectual property laws. Reproduction or transmission of the materials, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic, print, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Hisense Company Ltd. is a violation of Hisense Company Ltd. rights under the aforementioned laws. No part of this publication may be stored, reproduced, transmitted or distributed, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic or otherwise, whether or not for a charge or other or no consideration, without the prior written permission of Hisense Company Ltd. Requests for permission to store, reproduce, transmit or distribute materials may be made to one of the following addresses:
USA: Hisense USA Corporation PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 CANADA: Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 MEXICO: Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. Hisense, and any and all other Hisense product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Disclaimer Page
**Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, including in any or all descriptions, representations, statements or other communications related to this Hisense device (hereinafter Device) made in any form whatsoever and at any time, some or all of the pre-installed, or subsequently installed Application Services may not be available or capable of functioning as intended by the provider of the Application Services in any or all usage areas for reasons outside of Hisenses control, including but not limited to, Internet access, local service limitations, etc. Any purchase or use of the Device, including any Application Services, is purely at the users risk. Application Services are provided on an as-available basis without warranties of any kind, either expressed or implied, that the Application Service will be uninterrupted or error-free, including but not limited to vagaries of weather, disruption of Service, acts of God, warranties of title, local or regional limitations, no infringement, NOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No advice or information given by Hisense, providers, affiliates, or contractors or their respective employees shall create such a warranty. Hisense specifically disclaims responsibility for any or all Application Services from functioning at any time, and by purchasing the Device, you accept such disclaimer without any claim on Hisense. You are solely responsible for providing an active and working connection to the Internet, along with any and all hardware and/or software necessary to use the Hisense Device as intended. Table of Contents Connecting Devices to your TV ....................................................................................................3 Connecting an antenna, cable set-top box or satellite receiver ...................................................................3 Connecting a Satellite Receiver, DVD player ..............................................................................................3 Connecting an AV device with a component video cable ............................................................................4 Connecting an AV device with an HDMI cable .............................................................................................4 Connecting headphones .............................................................................................................................5 Connecting speakers (or other audio receivers) .........................................................................................5 Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel (ARC) ..........................................................6 Connecting your TV to a Wired or Wireless Network ...................................................................7 Connecting to a Wireless network ...............................................................................................................7 Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) network ...................................................................................................7 Using Your TV Remote Control .......................................................................................................9 Shortcuts Instructions ...................................................................................................................11 Completing the First-Time Setup Menu ........................................................................................12 Basic and Advanced TV Settings .................................................................................................14 Accessing the Quick Setup Menu ..............................................................................................................14 Picture Menu ..............................................................................................................................................14 Sound Menu ..............................................................................................................................................15 Channel Menu ...........................................................................................................................................15 Network Menu ...........................................................................................................................................15 System Menu .............................................................................................................................................16 About TV Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 17 Parental Controls ...........................................................................................................................18 Getting familiar with the Home screen .........................................................................................20 1 Table of Contents Live TV .......................................................................................................................................... 21 Viewing channel information ......................................................................................................................21 Viewing a channel list ................................................................................................................................21 Creating a Favorites list ...........................................................................................................................21 Viewing your Favorites list ........................................................................................................................21 Apps ................................................................................................................................................ 22 Opera TV Store .........................................................................................................................................22 TV Browser ................................................................................................................................................22 Installing an App .......................................................................................................................................22 Removing an App .....................................................................................................................................22 Moving App Icons around .........................................................................................................................23 Customizing the name of your TV .............................................................................................................23 Media .............................................................................................................................................. 23 Panels that appear on the Media screen ...................................................................................................23 File formats that are supported ..................................................................................................................23 Viewing Videos ..........................................................................................................................................23 Browsing Content ......................................................................................................................................23 Viewing Pictures as a Slideshow ...............................................................................................................24 Mirroring content from your device to the TV ........................................................................... 24 Software updates for your TV ..................................................................................................... 25 Quick Problem-Solving Tips ......................................................................................................... 26 2 Connecting Devices to your TV Connecting Devices to your TV You have several options for connecting your TV to different devices. The method in which you connect will be based upon the type of cables you have and the available outputs on your device. Connecting an antenna, cable set-top box or satellite receiver To connect an antenna,cable set-top box or satellite receiver:
1. Connect one end of a coaxial cable (not included) to the [RF OUT] jack on the antenna, cable or satellite box. If you are using an antenna with twin-lead cable, you may need a 300-75 Ohm adapter (not provided) to connect it to the back of your TV. Likewise, if you are using several antennas, you may need a combiner (not provided). 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the [ANT/CABLE] jack on the side of TV. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select TV as the input source. TV JACK ANT/CABLE
(not included) EXTERNAL DEVICE or Cable Set top box ANT OUT RF Out Figure 1. Antenna, cable set-top box or satellite receiver to the TV Connecting a Satellite Receiver, DVD player (or other Audio Visual (AV) device with a composite video cable (yellow/red/white) To connect an AV device with a composite video cable (not provided):
1. Use the audio and video cables to connect the composite video/audio jacks (of the external AV device) to the [AV IN] jacks of the TV. (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red). 2. Plug the connected devices into the AV connectors on the TV before switching it on. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select AV as the input source. TV JACK R N I V A L O E D V I Red(R) White(L) Audio Cable
(not included) Red(R) White(L) Yellow or Green(Video) Yellow(Video) Figure 2. AV device with a composite video cable EXTERNAL DEVICES VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top box Satellite antenna cable Satellite Receiver R L Video AV OUT 3 Connecting Devices to your TV Connecting an AV device with a component video cable (red/blue/green) To connect an AV device with a component cable (which is red/blue/green):
1. Use a component video cable (not provided) to connect the component output jacks of the external device to the YPBPR jacks for the TV. Use an audio cable to connect the component audio jacks of the external device to the TV AUDIO (L/R) jacks. 2. Plug the connected devices into the YPBPR and L/R ports on the TV before switching it on. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select Component as the input source. Red(R) White(L) Red(PR/CR) Audio Cable Red(R) White(L) Red(PR/CR) Blue(PB/CB) Component Cable Blue(PB/CB) Green(Y) Green(Y) Figure 3. AV device with a component video cable EXTERNAL DEVICES VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top box Satellite antenna cable R L PR PB Y Component Satellite Receiver TV JACK R NL I T N E N O P M O C R P B P Y NOTE One AV device can be connected to the TV using a component video or composite video cable. Connecting an AV device with an HDMI cable This 4K TV has two different software versions of HDMI ports to connect HDMI-enabled devices. The two high-powered HDMI version 2.0(HDMI 3, HDMI 4) inputs enable you to connect 4K Ultra-HD external devices that require more bandwidth to transmit to the TV screen. For example, if you have an X-box or Blu-ray player that supports the 2.0 standard. The two HDMI version 1.4 inputs are great for any of your external devices that support a standard full high-definition resolution of 1080p. Please refer to the User Manual that came with your device for step-by-step instructions. To connect an AV device with an HDMI cable:
1. Use an HDMI cable to connect the [HDMI] output port of the AV device to the [HDMI] jack of the TV. 2. Plug the connected devices into the power socket. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select the corresponding HDMI input. TV JACK I M D H EXTERNAL DEVICES HDMI Cable I M D H DVD Set-top Box Figure 4. AV device with an HDMI cable NOTES Because the HDMI connector provides video and audio signals, it is not necessary to connect an audio cable. The HDMI cable will not supplied with the product. We strongly recommend to use HDMI Cable with 2 cores as shown in the figure. 4 Connecting Devices to your TV You can connect an MHL-enabled device, such as a cell phone, and view the screen of your device on the TV. TV JACK I M D H L H M HDMI-to- MHL cable
(not included) Figure 5. MHL-enabled device to the TV NOTES This feature may be unavailable on some TV series. The MHL cable will not supplied with the product. We strongly recommend to use MHL Cable with 2 core as shown in the figure. Connecting headphones You can connect headphones to the [AUDIO OUT] port on your TV. While the headphone is connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. TV JACK
/
AUDIO OUT EXTERNAL DEVICES Audio Cable
(not included) Figure 6. Headphones to the TV Connecting speakers (or other audio receivers) To connect speakers (or other audio receivers) with an audio cable:
1. Use an audio cable (not provided) to connect the [DIGITAL AUDIO IN] jack of the audio receiver device to the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] jack of the TV. Another option is to use an RCA Y-cable (1/8-stereo mini to L/R phono) to connect an analog sound system to the [AUDIO OUT] jack of the TV. 2. Plug the connected devices into the main power socket before switching on the TV. TV JACKS DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Audio Cable
(not included)
/
AUDIO OUT Audio Cable
(not included) Red(R) White(L) EXTERNAL DEVICES Digital Sound Bar Audio Amplifier Powerless Bass Speaker Speaker Figure 7. Audio receiver with audio cable NOTE If you prefer to use Audio Return Channel, then follow the steps on the next page under 'Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel'. 5 Connecting Devices to your TV NOTES When a digital audio system is connected to the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] jack, decrease the TV and system volume. 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the TV is connected to an external device that supports a 5.1 channel surround sound You can receive 5.1 channel audio in one of two ways. The first way is to connect the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] jack from the device to the Amplifier. The second way is to connect the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] jack on the back of the TV to the [Optical]
port on the Amplifier.After youve completed one of the two methods then be sure to go into the Advanced Audio Settings of the TV and select RAW to receive the 5.1 channel audio. You will need to also go into the sound or audio settings of your device to ensure it is set to 5.1 Channel output. It may read Bitstream, RAW or Digital. Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel (ARC) If you'd like to use the Audio Return Channel (ARC) feature to have sound sent from the TV back down an HDMI cable to a digital soundbar, then you will need to connect the cable to the [HDMI / ARC] port. By using this feature, you will also be able to control the soundbar with your TV remote instead of having to use multiple remotes for each device. NOTE Only digital sound bars that require a wired connection are compatible with the H7 Series Smart TV. To connect a digital sound bar with an HDMI cable:
1. Connect the cable thats attached to the soundbar to the [HDMI / ARC] port on the TV. 2. Turn on the soundbar by pressing the Power button. 3. Press the Quick Setup menu button on your remote and press the right arrow on the [D-pad] of your remote to show the full menu settings and go to System > HDMI Function. 4. Turn on the CEC&MHL Control setting. 5. Press the Quick Setup menu button on your remote and press the right arrow on the [D-pad] of your remote to show the full menu settings. 6. Select Sound > Advance Audio Settings 7. Go to the section of the screen that reads TV Speaker & ARC and select ARC First. NOTE: If the device has an Input Selector feature then make sure to change it to TV. TV JACK C R A
/
I M D H EXTERNAL DEVICES HDMI Cable
(not included) Digital Sound Bar Figure 8. Digital Sound Bar to the HDMI / ARC port 6 Connecting your TV to a Wired or Wireless Network Connecting Your TV to a Wired or Wireless Network You have the option to connect your TV to a wireless or wired network to access the Internet. Connecting to a Wireless Network Wireless Router The LAN Port on the Wall Wireless Adapter built-in the TV set
(not included) LAN Cable Figure 9. Connect the TV to a wireless network Our built-in wireless LAN adapter supports the IEEE 802.11 ac/b/g/n communication protocols and we recommend that you use an IEEE 802.11n or IEEE 802.11ac router. When you play a video over an IEEE 802.11 b/g connection, the video may not play smoothly. NOTES You must use the Hisense built-in Wireless LAN Adapter to use a wireless network because the set does not support an external USB network adapter. To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. If the wireless IP sharer supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. If Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11N mode is selected and the Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixed) for your Access Point (AP), then the Hisense TV will not support a connection in compliance with these Wi-Fi certification specifications. If your access point (AP) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can connect to the network via Push Button Configuration
(PBC) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network You can attach your TV to your LAN in one of the three following ways:
Option 1. You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external modem using a Cat 5 LAN cable. See Figure 10. LAN Port on TV External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) The Modem Port on the Wall LAN Ethernet Cable Modem Cable Figure 10. Connect a LAN port on the TV to an external modem 7 Connecting your TV to a Wired or Wireless Network Option 2 You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the [LAN] port on the back of your TV to an IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use an Ethernet cable for the connection. See figure 11. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) IP Sharer (Router)
(with DHCP server) LAN Port on TV LAN Modem Cable Ethernet Cable Ethernet Cable Figure 11. Connect a LAN port on the TV to an IP sharer Option 3 Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the [LAN] port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet with an Ethernet cable. See the diagram below. The LAN Port on the Wall LAN Port on TV LAN Ethernet Cable If you have a Dynamic Network, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS, so you dont have to enter them manually. Most home networks are Dynamic Networks. Figure 12. Connect a LAN port on the TV to a network wall outlet Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually on your TVs Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). NOTE You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use static IP addresses. 8 Using Your TV Remote Control Buttons on your TV remote Infrared transmitter Power on / off Change TV input source Enter Channels / input numbers Turn Closed Caption On/Off Quick Setup menu D-pad (up/down/left/right navigation buttons) Return to the previous place in the menu or app Volume (up/down) Mute and restore sound Media content control function buttons Adjust Sleep timer setting Dash button Select a digital sub-channel Special function buttons All Apps Confirm button Display the Home screen Exit the application Live TV Channel (up/down) APP APP APP APP Quick access buttons to apps 9 Using Your TV Remote Control Begin using your remote 1. Slide the back cover to open the battery compartment of the remote control. Gently push and slide 2. Insert two AAA size batteries. Make sure to match the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries with the (+) and (-) ends indicated in the Gently push and slide Insert the batteries battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery compartment cover. Important Information about the remote and batteries:
Discard batteries in a designated disposal area. Do not throw them into a fire. Remove old batteries immediately to prevent them from leaking into the battery compartment. If you do not intend to use the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries. Battery chemicals can cause a rash. If the batteries leak, clean the battery compartment with a cloth. If chemicals touch your skin then wash it immediately. Do not mix old and new batteries. Do not mix alkaline, standard (carbon-zinc) or rechargeable (NiCd, NiMH, etc.) batteries. Do not continue using the remote if it gets warm or hot. Call our Support Center immediately on the Hisense support website. Remote Control Range Information The remote control can work at a distance of up to 26 feet in front of the TV set. It can work at a 30 degree horizontal or vertical angle. Program Your Universal Cable or Satellite Remote Control to Operate Your New Hisense Television
(only for USA) If you would like to program your other household remote controls to your new Hisense television,please refer to the User's Manual supplied by your Cable or Satellite provider. The Cable or Satellite providers' User's Manuals should include instructions on how to program their remote to your television. A list of Hisense codes for the most common Cable and Satellite providers are listed below. Use the Hisense code that is associated with your Cable or Satellite provider (if applicable). DIRECTV......0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable......386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 Comcast......0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications......0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network......505, 627, 538, 720, 659 If the Hisense code associated with your Cable or Satellite provider is not listed, does not work or you cannot locate the instructions to program your remote, call your local Cable or Satellite providers customer service center. If your Cable or Satellite provider does not have a Hisense code available, please contact us. Using Your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote If you prefer to use your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote, then visit the Support page to view a list of the codes. 10
1 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 974.55 KiB |
Shortcuts Instructions Shortcuts Instructions You can use shortcuts on the remote control for fast operation. For more information about your TV remote, refer to the Quick Start Guide in accessories. Turning your TV on or off To turn your TV on:
1. Connect the power cord to the back of the TV, then plug the power cord into an AC outlet. 2. When the TV is powered on, press the [
To turn your TV off, press the [
] button on the remote to turn TV.
] button on the remote. NOTES When your TV is in standby mode, it is still consuming power. To completely disconnect power, please remove the plug from the AC outlet. If your TV does not receive an input signal for several minutes, it automatically goes into standby mode Selecting the Input Source Select the Input Source depending on the video device you have connected to your TV. To select the input source:
1. Turn on your TV, then press the [INPUT] button on the remote, the list of Source appears. 2. Press the [< / >] buttons to select the input source. 3. Press the [OK] button to confirm your selection. Using the Live TV To view broadcast programs, press the [Live TV] button on your remote. Channel search guide When you select TV as input, if no TV channels were saved before, you will be prompted to do a channel search. Before channel tuning could start, you must specify the tune mode, Antenna or Cable. You can also go to Setting menu > Channel to change the channel settings. Launch Live TV After channel tuning is done for the first time, the screen will display Live TV operating tips, including: how to start the channel list, how to start channel info and so on.
[OK] Show channel list
[ v ] View channel info
[Back] View recent channels Show channel list View channel info PRE-CH 11 Completing the First-Time Setup Menu Now that you have attached the TV stand and connected your external devices, it's time to complete the first-time setup menu. Completing the First-Time Setup Menu Press the [Power] button on the remote to turn on the TV. A splash screen that shows the Hisense logo appears. Next, the First-Time Setup Menu begins by prompting you to choose your Language, Country, and Time Zone. After the splash screen that displays the Hisense logo appears, begin the first-time setup menu. Screen Language and Location LANGUAGE AND LOCATION Language English Country United State Time Zone Select Language Terms Mode Network Input Done Terms of Service TERMS OF SERVICE Accept all The EULA and Terms must be accepted in order to continue. Accept EULA Accept Terms of Serv... Language Terms Mode Network Input Done TV Usage Mode TV USAGE MODE TV Mode Home Home Mode In Home Mode, your TV will automatically adjust the brightness of your screen based on the ambient light in the room. Language Terms Mode Network Input Done Task 1. Using the D-pad arrows of your remote, choose your Language, Country and Time Zone. 2. Next, navigate to the Forward arrow and press [OK]. TIP: The edge of the drop-down boxes and the back and forward arrows change to blue when you select them. 1. Press [OK] on your remote to select Accept All. 2. When youre done, then navigate to the Forward arrow and press [OK]. Select Home (which appears by default) and then navigate to the Forward arrow to press [OK]. Note: Store mode should only be selected by Retailers who plan to demonstrate the TV. Disclaimer: Images throughout this document are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual product. 12 Completing the First-Time Setup Menu First-time Setup Menu (continued) Screen Network Connection NETWORK CONNECTION Task If your TV does not automatically detect an Ethernet con-
nection, then select Wi-Fi. When youre done, select your network from the list that displays and move to the next screen. Ethernet WiFi Connecting Ethernet Configure Language Terms Mode Network Input Done LIVE TV INPUT SOURCE Select how you receive your TV channels. Choose from one of the following sources below and then move to the next screen. TV AV COMPONENT HDMI NOTE: If you use an antenna to receive channels, then you must complete the first-time setup menu in order to run a channel scan. CONGRATULATIONS! Your TV is now ready to use. Press [OK] on your remote if you are fine with the selections that appear on the screen. Otherwise, navigate to the back arrow on the screen to change your selection. CONGRATULATIONS !
Your TV is now ready to use TV Selections English United States Eastern Home Mode Ethernet TV OK Language Terms Mode Network Input Done 13 Basic and Advanced TV Settings Your Hisense TV comes with many TV setting features to allow you to customize the picture based on your viewing preference and environment. As you navigate throughout different screens to access settings, some of the indicators appear as words On and Off and some are open [o] and closed [I] symbols. An [o] indicator signifies a feature that is disabled. Accessing the Quick Setup Menu You can press the [Quick Setup] menu button [
] and press the right arrow on the D-pad to view the full menu settings. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Picture Mode Standard Brightness 50 Contrast 50 Color 50 Aspect Ratio Auto Backlight Advanced Picture Settings Restore Defaults Picture Sound The Quick Setup menu consists of the following settings:
Channel Network System About TV Picture Menu If youd like to configure the settings for your picture, then there are six types of picture modes available: Vivid, Standard, Theater, Energy Saving, Game and Sport. Once you choose the mode, you can adjust the picture based on the following settings:
Brightness: Adjust the Brightness level to generate lighter or darker images. Contrast: Adjust the Contrast level to increase or decrease how bright images appear. Color: Adjust the color intensity of the picture for a more vibrant image. Aspect Ratio: Adjust the Aspect Ratio to stretch or zoom in on your picture. You can choose from the following settings: Normal, Zoom, Wide, Cinema, 1:1 PIXEL MAP, Panoramic, Direct, Auto. Backlight: This TV has a Dynamic Backlight Control setting that you can set to high or low. The Backlight setting enables you to adjust how bright you want images to appear. In addition, an Eco Sensor setting is available that will enable the TV to automatically adjust the picture settings according to the amount of ambient light in your room. This is a money-saving feature because it reduces power consumption. Advanced Picture Settings: Adjust advanced picture settings based on your viewing preference. Display: Adjust advanced picture settings in the component source. OverScan: Disable the overscan for PC inputs to fully display all menu items at the edges of the screen. Tint: Adjust the colors from a green to magenta tint to view the natural skin tones of people on the screen. Sharpness: Adjust how sharp or soft edges of images appear. Noise Reduction: Improve how clear the picture appears by reducing noise. Adaptive Contrast: Automatically darken dark areas and lighten light areas of images to see more details. Color Temperature: Select a preset color temperature. White Balance: Adjust the intensity of red, green and blue lights to view the true colors of all images in the picture. Color Tuner: Adjust the Hue, Saturation and Brightness of color settings. Restore Defaults : Restore all the picture settings in the current picture mode to the factory default values. 14 Basic and Advanced TV Settings Sound Menu Sound Mode: Select a preset sound mode to suit the type of content you are listening to: Standard, Theater, Music , Speech and Late Night. Set the sound effects to suit your preference:
Configure your audio settings for your sound preferences. Once you choose the mode, you can adjust the audio based on the following settings:
TMAudio Enhancements: dbx-tvs Total Technology delivers the best possible TV sound for your TV. Sound Mode Standard Audio Enhancements Advanced Audio Settings Restore Defaults Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Total Sonics: Optimizes overall sound quality by increasing bass, making dialog clear and natural, and widening the sound field. Total Surround: Provides surround sound experience with psycho-
acoustic processing to place sounds beside, behind, and above the viewer. For best results use with Total Sonics. Total Volume: Maintains consistent loudness levels from wide dynamic range programs, too-loud commercials, and channel or input changes. Advanced Audio Settings: Tune the audio settings and quality of the TV. Equalizer: Boost the volume at different frequencies. Lip Sync: Synchronize the displayed image with the audio output. Balance: Adjust the left and right speaker strength to optimize audio for a specific location. Digital Audio Out: Select the digital audio output format that best suits the audio device type. For example, choose RAW (which is uncompressed audio in RAW form) if you have 5.1 Channel Surround Sound Speaker set up. Choose PCM if you have an amplifier that does not support Dolby Digital technology. Digital Audio Delay: Adjust the digital audio output delay time to sync sound from an external speaker with the images on the TV. TV Speaker & ARC: Select the TV speaker or an external speaker for sound output. Audio Out: Change the way audio is sent through the type of device thats connected to your TV Audio Out port. Restore Defaults : Restore all of the audio settings in current audio mode to the factory default values. Channel Menu Tuner Mode: Select Tuner Mode if you receive TV channels over the air (antenna) or directly through a cable connection without using a set top box. The input will be used during a channel scan. Auto Channel Scan: Automatically scan for channels to view programming from your TV source. Channel Skip: Skip a channel that your TV picked up during a previous channel scan search. Favorites List: Quickly access your most-watched channels by creating a Favorites list. Network Menu Network Configuration: Set up the network to gain full access of Smart TV features. Connection Type: Ethernet Choose a wired network connection to access the Internet. Ethernet: Display the network connection status. IP Setting Mode: Configure the IP setting for your network connection. 15 Tuner Mode Antenna Auto Channel Scan Channel Skip Favorites List Network Configuration Network Information Disconnected Anyview Stream On TV Name Smart TV Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Basic and Advanced TV Settings Connection Type: Wireless Choose a wireless network connection to access the Internet. Advanced Settings: Configure the advanced wireless network settings for the TV. Available Networks: Select an available network to connect. And you can also add wireless network or refresh wireless network. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Location USA Time Language Parental Controls Application Settings Closed Caption HDMI Function Advanced Settings Connection Type: Off Turn off the Internet connection. Network Information: View information about your network connection. Anyview Stream: Share video, music or other content from another device on to your TV screen. TV Name: Choose a name for your TV. The name will be shown to devices that are available for sharing data. System Menu Location: Choose the location from where you will watch your TV. Time: Set the current time based on your location. Time Zone: Select your time zone. Time Format: Set the time to display in a 12 or 24-hour format. Daylight Savings: Select whether to apply Daylight Savings Time to the TV. Date/Time: Set the Date and Time. Power On Timer: Enable the Power On Timer to Off, Once or Daily. Power Off Timer: Enable the Sleep Timer to Off, Once or Daily. Sleep Timer: Set the sleep timer to automatically turn the TV Off within a specified time: Off, 10 Minutes, 20 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 40 Minutes, 50 Minutes, 60 Minutes, 90 Minutes and 120 Minutes. Language: Adjust the default language settings for the TV. Parental Controls: Turn On Parental Controls to block children from being able to view certain programs. The default password is 0000. Locks: Enable or disables all locks. All selected locks can be turned off for parental viewing and easily turned on again. Block Time: Block certain channels and programs during certain periods of time. Channel Block: Block programs by channels when you turn On the Parental Controls feature. Program Block: Blocks programs according to their TV or MPAA (movie) rating when you have turned on the Parental Controls feature and selected that rating to be blocked. Input Block : Block content from devices that are connected to certain TV ports. Change PIN: Change your PIN that you use to access Parental Controls. If you want to change your parental control password, first enter the new password then enter the same password again. NOTE If you forget your password, call the Hisense Consumer Electronics Care Center or reset your TV back to the factory settings. Restore Parental Control Defaults: Restore Parental Control back to the factory default setting. Application Settings: Set settings for apps on your TV. Netflix : Remove this TV from your Netflix account. Please contact Netflix if you want to stop being billed for you service. ESN : Display the Netflix Electronic Serial Number. VUDU : Remove this TV from your VUDU account. Please contact VUDU if you 16 Basic and Advanced TV Settings want to stop being billed for you service. Closed Caption: Adjust Closed Captioning settings. Analog Caption: Select an Analog Caption setting from Off, CC1-CC4, Text 1-TEXT4. CC1-CC4: Closed captioning appears in a small banner across the bottom of the screen. CC1 is usually the printed version of the audio. CC2-CC4 display content are provided by the broadcaster.Text1-Text4: Closed captioning that covers half or all of the screen. Text1-Text4 display content are provided by the broadcaster. Off: To turn off the Analog Caption. Digital Caption: Select a Digital Caption setting: Off,CS1-CS6. Digital CC Settings: There are two caption styles. One is the automatic function set as the broadcaster, while the other is the custom style where you can adjust the Style, Size, Font, Text Color, Text Opacity, Background Color etc. HDMI Function : Configure how to control CEC-enabled devices with your TV remote. CEC & MHL Control: Allow HDMI devices to control each other. Device Auto Power Off: Allow CEC-enabled devices to turn Off with the TV. TV Auto Power On: Allow the TV to turn On with CEC-enabled devices. Device Connect: Allow CEC-enabled devices to communicate with each other when connected through an HDMI cable. CEC Device Lists: View a list of all CEC-enabled devices. NOTE HDMI cables must be used to connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV. The HDMI CEC feature of the connected device must be turned on. If you connect an HDMI device that is not HDMI CEC-compatible, all the HDMI-CEC Control features do not work. Depending on the connected HDMI device, the HDMI-CEC Control feature may not work. Advanced Settings: Access the Advanced Settings menu. Menu Timeout : Set the amount of time that youd like for the menu to display : 10s, 20s , 30s , 60s or Off. Use Mode: Set the TV to use in Home, Store Mode, or Store Mode with 4K Video. Input Labels: Edit the input labels. Default LiveTV Source: Select the default input selected by the remote control Live TV button. Setup Wizard: Use the Setup Wizard for instructions to help you set up your TV. Power Indicator: Set the Power Indicator light to stay On or Off when watching TV. About TV Menu About TV System Information: View system information. Hisense Legal Disclaimer: Read the Hisense Legal Disclaimer. Auto Firmware Upgrade: Set your TV to automatically receive the latest firmware. Check Firmware Upgrade: Check to ensure that your TV has received the latest firmware. Restore To Factory Default: Restore your TV back to the factory default. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV System Information Hisense Legal Disclaimer Auto Firmware Upgrade On Check Firmware Upgrade Restore To Factory Default 17
1 | User Manual 3 | Users Manual | 66.16 KiB |
Parental Controls Parental Controls The Parental Controls setting allows you to block content that is not appropriate for children to watch. You can do this by creating a 4-digit passcode. The factory-default passcode is 0000. Turning Parental Controls 'On'
To access Parental Controls:
1. Press the [Quick Setup] menu button on your remote. 2. Press the right arrow button to display the full menu settings. 3. Select System > Parental Controls > Locks. 4. Press [OK] on your remote. An Enter PIN window displays. Using the numerical keypad on your remote, enter the factory-default passcode 0000 and press [OK]. Press [OK] button on the D-pad to turn the locks 'On'. You will see the other Parental Control settings change from a greyed out state and become highlighted. When this occurs, begin adding other settings to the Block Time, Channel Block, Program Block, Input Block, Change PIN or Restore Parental Control Defaults features. NOTE All ratings that are higher than those you select are also blocked. For example, if you choose to block the PG-13 rating, then the higher ratings (R and NC-17) are automatically blocked too. Block Time Choose a time of day that youd like to start blocking certain programs. Channel Block Block programs by channels when you turn on the Parental Controls feature. Program Block Block programs according to their TV or MPAA (movie) rating when you have turned on the Parental Controls feature and selected that rating to be blocked. Input Block Block content from devices that are connected to certain TV ports. Change PIN Change your PIN that you use to access Parental Controls. Restore Parental Control Defaults Restore Parental Controls back to the factory setting. 18 Parental Controls Description of U.S. TV Ratings Content FV D L S V Defined as Fantasy Violence Suggestive dialog Course or crude language Sexual situations Violence Description of Age-based Ratings TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA All children Directed to older children General audience Parental Guidance Suggested Parents strongly cautioned Mature Audiences Only U.S. Movie Ratings Rating G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X Defined as General audience Parental Guidance suggested Parents strongly cautioned Restricted No one 17 and under permitted A rating that has now been superseded by NC-17 Defined as Children Children 8 years and older General programming that is suitable for all audiences Parental Guidance Viewers 14 years and older Adult Programming Canadian English Ratings Rating C C8+
G PG 14+
18+
Canadian French Ratings Rating G 8ans+
Defined as General (appropriate for all ages and must contain little to no violence or sexual content) General but inadvisable for young children(could contain scenes disturbing to children under eight). Recommended for viewing with parent. Programming is appropriate for children 13 and older and may contain moderate violence, language and some sexual situations. Recommended for children 16 and older and may contain strong violence, language and sexual content. Programming intended for viewers that are 18 and older. Programming may contain extreme violence and graphic sexual content/pornography. 13ans+
16ans+
18ans+
NOTE If you forget your passcode, call the Hisense Consumer Electronics Care Center or choose Restore Parental Control defaults from the Parental Controls settings menu. 19 Getting familiar with the Home screen Getting familiar with the Home screen The simple design of the Home screen menu makes it easy to navigate. It accesses Apps, Media or Inputs. To access the Home screen, press the [
] button on your remote control and use the arrows buttons to make your selection. NOTE The menus are only for reference, may vary slightly from the actual screen. 3 1 2 Indicators and Icons on the top of the Home screen You can always view the current time in the top right corner of the Home screen. Figure 13. Home screen If your TV is connected to the Internet through a wireless connection or an Ethernet cable, then an icon will display in the top right corner of the screen. This location makes it very convenient for you to determine if you still have Internet connectivity as you use the TV. In addition, if you have connected a device (such as a thumb drive) to a USB port and your TV recognizes it, then a device icon will also display in the same area. The Apps appear on the Home screen Each time you access the Home screen, the Apps will display on the screen. You can quickly enter these applications what you want. The navigation bar appear on the Home screen Press the [ / ] buttons to select icons of the navigation bar, you can enter to Apps, Media and Input. 20 Live TV LiveTV To view broadcast programs, select the Live TV icon on the screen or press the [Live TV] button on your remote. Viewing Channel information As you use the [Channel] button on your remote to scroll through channels, an information banner appears on the top of the screen. 1 2 3 4 5 Cable Californias Golden Parks 7:00PM 7:30PM 7:00 PM Mon. 31 Dec. 7:30PM-8:00PM Californias Gold 6 7 9 10 Figure 14. Information banner DTV 16:9 undefined 8 More Info 11 The information banner displays the following information:
1 Channel number 2 Lock status 3 Input 4 Program name 5 Show identification 6 Channel name 7 Current date and time 8 Prompt 9 Beginning and end time of the next program 10 Start/Stop time progress bar of the current program 11 More info If you are watching a particular channel, you can also press the up arrow on the [D-pad] of your remote to view channel information. Viewing a channel list After you have done an automatic channel scan (if you're using an Antenna) or are receiving your channels through a cable provider, you can view your list of channels by pressing [OK] on your remote. You will see the channel list display on the right side of the screen. Creating a 'Favorites' list To quickly access your most-watched channels, you can create a 'Favorites' list. To create your 'Favorites' list:
1. Press the [Quick Setup] menu button on your remote. 2. Select Channel> Favorites List 3. Using the up/down arrows on the [D-pad] of your remote, select a channel and press [OK]. A heart-shaped indicator will appear beside the channel as confirmation that it has been successfully added. Viewing your 'Favorites' list To view channels that you've added to your Favorites list simply press [OK] on your remote to call out the Channel list. The channel list appears on the right side of the screen and heart-shaped icons are shown next to the channels that make up your Favorites list. 21 APPS Apps Apps Numerous factory-installed apps are available for you to choose from for your entertainment preferences. Opera TV Store Opera TV Store contains cloud-based apps optimized for your TV. The apps range from Video, Music, Social Networking, Games and News Information. To begin using Opera TV Store, you simply need to accept the End-User License Agreement and then select the app that you want to use. TV Browser The TV Browser allows you to surf the Internet on your TV and provides quick access to the Google search engine. To view a website or search using the TV Browser:
1. Using the Navigation buttons on your remote, navigate to TV Browser icon. 2. Press [OK] on your remote. The browser window displays. 3. Using the navigation buttons on your remote, navigate up to the URL bar to place your cursor there. 4. Press [OK] on your remote to bring up the on-screen keyboard. 5. Type the website address or search term on the text field. 6. Press the [Blue] special function button towards the top of the remote (under the number pad). The website address or search term youve typed populates in the URL bar window. 7. Select the forward arrow (to the right of the URL bar) and press [OK] on your remote to load the page or start the search. Installing an App Even though your TV has numerous factory-installed apps, there may be others that youd like to download. To install an app:
1. From the Home screen, click on the My Apps icon. 2. Navigate to Opera TV Store. 3. Navigate to the Search tab at the top of the screen. 4. Begin typing the name of the app. As you begin typing the first two to three letters the Opera Store suggests words to quicken your search time. 5. Use the navigation buttons of your remote to select the app. A page displays that shows a written description of the app. 6. Click on Open or Add to Favorites. Removing an App You can only delete apps that youve downloaded to the TV. Factory-installed apps can not be deleted. To delete an app:
1. From the My Apps screen, use the directional arrows on the navigation buttons of your remote to select the app that you want to remove. 2. Press the [Red] on your remote control. A dialog message displays that asks if youre sure you want to remove the app. 3. Press [OK] on your remote. A confirmation message displays and the icon is removed from the My Apps list. NOTE If an app is deleted,the information related to that app is also removed. 22
1 | User Manual 4 | Users Manual | 200.91 KiB |
Media Moving App Icons around Select the app you want to move, then press the [Green] on your remote control and press [ / / < / >] to change order. NOTE Apps may be updated without prior notice, please take the actual as standard. Some applications may not be available, depending on your TV series and the area you are. Customizing the name of your TV If you have several TVs in your home then you may want to customize the name of your TV. By giving your TV a name, it will make it easier for you to identify it when connecting devices to the TV to stream or mirror content. To customize the name of your TV:
1. Press the [
2. Go to Full menu settings > Network >TV Name. 3. Select User Input and press [OK] to bring up the keyboard and begin typing the name. 4. When you are finished, power off the TV and power it back on for the change to take effect. Media
] button on your remote to open the Quick Setup menu. Media is a central location for you to upload and view or listen to different types of content (for example, your photos, music and movies) through the following methods:
A USB thumb drive or hard drive Your mobile phone, tablet or other personal device: You can stream movies, pictures and photos that are stored on your personal device and play or view the content on your TV. When you connect your thumb drive or other personal device to the TV, the TV automatically detects it and displays a device icon in the top right corner of the screen. Our company-developed HiMedia technology is what this Media feature is developed upon. Panels that appear on the Media screen The Media screen displays four panels: All, Picture, Video, Music. File formats that may be supported NOTE: Due to differences in programming tools and other factors, some of the file formats that are listed may or may not be supported. Medium Videos File Format
.avi(MPEG2, Divx), .mkv(Divx), .mpeg(MPEG2), .wmv(Divx, XviD)
.JPG
.avi(mp3, WMA, ac3), .mp3 Picture Music Viewing Videos While viewing videos you will see a number of icons appear at the bottom of the screen. You can use the [D-pad] button of your remote to select these icons that will control the video. Browsing Content To browse through content based on the type that you wish to access:
1. Navigate to the appropriate menu tab on the left side of the screen and select Music, Video or Picture. The library of items displays on the right side of the screen. 23 Mirroring content from your device to the TV 2. Navigate to the right side of the screen and click on the name of the folder that contains your content. 3. Make your selection to play or view the content. If you want to close out of the Media center, then press the [Exit] button on your remote. Viewing Pictures as a Slideshow To view pictures in a slideshow:
1. Navigate to the Pictures tab. 2. Click on Start the Slideshow. The slideshow of your pictures begins to play. To stop the slideshow, press the [OK] button on your remote and press it again to restart it. Using Anyview Cast to mirror content from your device to the TV screen The Hisense Anyview Cast is an app that enables you to share (or cast) a video, audio or image from your Android-based device to the TV. From your tablet or phone To mirror content from your tablet to the TV:
1. From the TV Settings, go to Network and turn on the Anyview Stream setting. 2. Press the [All Apps] button on your remote and select the Anyview Cast app. 3. Turn on your Android-based device and go to Settings > Display > Cast Screen. NOTE: Some Android-based devices may not support casting. 4. Find your TV in the list of devices that displays and select it. 5. Wait for the Creating Connection progress bar to complete on the TV screen and the video or image will display in a moment. 24 Software updates for your TV Software updates for your TV The software (also referred to as firmware) is part of what powers your TV. Hisense will provide software updates to continuously enhance your TV and correct any issues that may impact your user experience; therefore, we recommend that you keep your TV connected to the Internet to automatically receive updates when they are available. You can choose to receive updates automatically or check for software updates and install them manually. Checking for updates automatically In order for your TV to receive software notification updates automatically, it must be turned 'On' and connected to the Internet. The Auto Firmware Upgrade setting (which enables your TV to receive the updates automatically) is turned to 'On' by factory default. If you turn the Auto Firmware Upgrade setting 'Off', it will disable this functionality of your TV. Note: While your TV is on and checking for updates, the program that you are watching will not be interrupted. Disabling the Auto Firmware Upgrade feature If you do not want your TV to automatically check for updates and to receive notifications when they are available, then:
1. Using your remote, press the [Quick Setup] menu button. 2. Go to About TV > Auto Firmware Upgrade and turn the feature 'Off'
By doing this, you will have to manually check to see if you have the latest software update. Checking for the latest firmware To manually check for the latest firmware:
1. Using your remote, press the [Quick Setup] menu button. 2. Go to About TV > Check Firmware Upgrade. Upgrade Current version: V00.01.00a.F0116 Latest version: V000100aF0114 Upgrade content Upgrade Cancel Never Reminder Figure 15. Check Firmware screenshot Manually installing software updates If you have not kept your TV connected to the Internet or you turned the Auto Firmware Upgrade feature 'Off' then you'll need to manually install the software. If the Check Firmware Upgrade screen shows that an updated package is available, then:
1. From the Check Firmware submenu, select Download upgrade pack. 2. Follow the rest of the steps that display 25 Quick Problem-Solving Tips When you experience an issue with your TV, turn it off and on again. If this does not resolve the problem, then refer to the tips below. If the problem is still not resolved, then contact us. ISSUES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Check to see if the power cord is plugged into a power outlet. A power switch on the right side bottom edge of the front panel must be turned on. Press the Power There is no sound or picture from the TV I have connected an external source to my TV and do not see a picture and/or hear any sound When I turn on my TV, there is a delay for a few seconds before the picture appears. Is this normal?
The picture is normal but there is no sound Sound but no picture or black and white picture The sound and/or picture is distorted or appears wavy The sound and picture is blurry or cuts out A horizontal or vertical stripe appears on the picture and/or the picture is shaking The plastic cabinet makes a
"clicking" type of sound The remote control does not work NOTE button on the remote control to activate the unit from 'Standby' mode. Check to see if the LED light is on or not. If it is, then the TV is receiving power. Check for the correct output connection on the external source and for the correct input connection on the TV. Make sure you have made the correct selection for the input mode for the incoming signal. Yes, this is normal. The TV is initializing and searching for previous setting information. Check the volume settings. Check if 'Mute' mode is set to On. If the picture is black and white, unplug the TV from the AC outlet and replug it after 60 seconds. Check that the Color is set to 50 or higher. Try different TV channels. An electric appliance may be affecting the TV. Turn off any appliances that are nearby and move it farther away from the TV. Insert the power plug of the TV set into another power outlet. If using an external antenna, check the direction, position and connection of the antenna. Adjust the direction of your antenna or reset or fine tune the channel. Check to see if there is an appliance or electric tool nearby that is causing interference. The 'click' sound can occur when the temperature of the television changes. This change causes the television cabinet to expand or contract, which makes the sound. This is normal and the TV is OK. Confirm that TV still has power and is operational. Change the batteries in the remote control. Check if the batteries are correctly installed. For usage in Mexico , operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions : 1 ) it is possible that this device doesnt cause any detrimental interference and 2 ) this device must take any kind of interference, including that which may cause its malfunctioning. Disclaimer: Images throughout this document are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual product. 26
1 | User Manual 5 | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB |
USER MANUAL Before using the TV, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference. ES-G154912 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL USER MANUAL Before using the TV, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference. ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Copyright Statement Hisense USA Corporation PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved. All material in this User Manual is the property of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries, and is protected under US and International copyright and/or other intellectual property laws. Reproduction or transmission of the materials, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic, print, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Hisense Company Ltd., is a violation of Hisense Company Ltd. rights under the aforementioned laws. No part of this publication may be stored, reproduced, transmitted or distributed, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic or otherwise, whether or not for a charge or other or no consideration, without the prior written permission of Hisense Company Ltd. Requests for permission to store, reproduce, transmit or distribute materials may be made in writing to the following address:
USA:
CANADA: Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 MEXICO: Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Sharp, Aquos, Quattron and any and all other Sharp product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks owned exclusively by Sharp Corporation. Hisense, and any and all other Hisense product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks and intellectual property rights of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries. This product is sold to you under one or more license agreements between Sharp Corporation and Hisense International
(Hong Kong) America Investment Co. Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. 1 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Disclaimer Page
**Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, including in any or all descriptions, representations, statements or other communications related to this Sharp, Aquos or Quattron device (hereinafter Device) made in any form whatsoever and at any time, some or all of the pre-installed, or subsequently installed Application Services may not be available or capable of functioning as intended by the provider of the Application Services in any or all usage areas for reasons outside of the control of the licensors or manufacturer of this device, including but not limited to, Internet access, local service limitations, etc. Any purchase or use of the Device, including any Application Services, is purely at the users risk. Application Services are provided on an as-available basis without warranties of any kind, either expressed or implied, that the Application Service will be uninterrupted or error-free, including but not limited to vagaries of weather, disruption of Service, acts of God, warranties of title, local or regional limitations, no infringement, NOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. No advice or information given by the licensors or manufacturers providers, affiliates, or contractors or their respective employees shall create such a warranty. All licensors and the manufacturer of this device, jointly and separately, specifically disclaim any and all responsibility for any or all Application Services from functioning at any time, and by purchasing the Device, you accept such disclaimer without any claim on the licensors and manufacturer. You are solely responsible for providing an active and working connection to the Internet, along with any and all hardware and/or software necessary to use the Device as intended. Disclaimer:
Images throughout this document are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual product. 2 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Content Content ...............................................................................................................3 Connecting Devices to your TV ........................................................................5 Connecting an antenna, cable set-top box or satellite receiver ................................................5 Connecting a satellite receiver, DVD player or other audio visual (AV) device with a composite video cable (yellow/red/white)..................................................................................5 Connecting an AV device with a component video cable (red/blue/green) .............................6 Connecting an AV device with an HDMI cable ..........................................................................6 Connecting an MHL-Enabled device .........................................................................................7 Connecting a headphone ..........................................................................................................7 Connecting speakers or other audio receivers ..........................................................................7 Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................8 Connecting a USB device ..........................................................................................................8 Connecting Your TV to a Wireless or Wired Network .....................................9 Connecting to a wireless network ..............................................................................................9 Connecting to a wired (Ethernet) network................................................................................10 Using Your TV Remote Control .......................................................................11 Buttons on your TV remote .......................................................................................................11 Remote control range information ............................................................................................11 Begin using your remote ..........................................................................................................12 Completing the First-Time Setup Menu .........................................................13 Shortcuts Instructions .....................................................................................15 Turning your TV on or off ..........................................................................................................15 Selecting the input source .......................................................................................................15 Using the Live TV .....................................................................................................................15 Basic Settings ..................................................................................................17 Using the Settings Menu ..........................................................................................................17 Picture Menu ............................................................................................................................18 Sound Menu .............................................................................................................................19 Channel Menu ..........................................................................................................................19 Network Menu ..........................................................................................................................20 System Menu ...........................................................................................................................20 About TV Menu ........................................................................................................................21 Parental Controls ......................................................................................................................22 3 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Advanced TV Settings .....................................................................................24 Getting familiar with the Home screen .....................................................................................24 Inputs .......................................................................................................................................24 Media .......................................................................................................................................25 Apps .........................................................................................................................................26 Using Anyview Cast to mirror content from your device to the TV screen...............................27 Software updates for your TV ...................................................................................................28 Quick Problem-Solving Tips ...........................................................................29 4 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting Devices to your TV You have several options for connecting your TV to different devices. The method in which you connect will be based upon the type of cables you have and the available outputs on your device. Connecting an antenna, cable set-top box or satellite receiver To connect an antenna,cable set-top box or satellite receiver:
1. Connect one end of a coaxial cable (not included) to the RF OUT port on the antenna, cable or satellite box. If you are using an antenna with twin-lead cable, you may need a 300-75 Ohm adapter (not provided) to connect it to the back of your TV. Likewise, if you are using several antennas, you may need a combiner (not provided). 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the ANT/CABLE port on the side of TV. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select TV as the input source. TV PORT ANT/CABLE or EXTERNAL DEVICE Cable Set top box ANT OUT RF Out Connecting a satellite receiver, DVD player or other audio visual (AV) device with a composite video cable (yellow/red/white) To connect an AV device with a composite video cable (not provided):
1. Use the audio and video cables to connect the composite video/audio ports of the external AV device to the AV IN ports of the TV. (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red) 2. Plug the connected devices into the AV connectors on the TV before switching it on. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select AV as the input source. TV PORTS R N I V A L O E D V I Red (R) White (L) Audio Cable Red (R) White (L) Yellow or Green (Video) Yellow (Video) Video Cable EXTERNAL DEVICES R L Video AV OUT VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top box Satellite antenna cable Satellite Receiver 5 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting an AV device with a component video cable (red/blue/green) To connect an AV device with a component cable (not provided):
1. Use a component video cable to connect the component output ports of the external device to the YPBPR ports for the TV. (Y = green, PB = blue, and PR = red). Use an audio cable to connect the component audio ports of the external device to the TV AUDIO (L/R) ports. 2. Plug the connected devices into the YPBPR and L/R ports on the TV before switching it on. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select COMPONENT as the input source. TV PORTS R NL I T N E N O P M O C R P B P Y Red(R) White(L) Red(PR/CR) Audio Cable Red(R) White(L) Red(PR/CR) Blue(PB/CB) Component Cable Blue(PB/CB) Green(Y) Green(Y) EXTERNAL DEVICES VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top box Satellite antenna cable R L PR PB Y Component Satellite Receiver NOTE One AV device can be connected to the TV using a component video or composite video cable. Connecting an AV device with an HDMI cable This 4K TV has two different software versions of HDMI ports to connect HDMI-enabled devices. The two high-powered HDMI version 2.0 (HDMI 3, HDMI 4) inputs enable you to connect 4K Ultra-HD external devices that require more bandwidth to transmit to the TV screen. For example, if you have an X-box or Blu-ray player that supports the 2.0 standard. The two HDMI version 1.4 inputs are great for any of your external devices that support a standard full high-
definition resolution of 1080p. Please refer to the User Manual that came with your device for step-by-step instructions. To connect an AV device with an HDMI cable (not provided):
1. Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI output port of the AV device to the HDMI port of the TV. 2. Plug the connected devices into the HDMI port on the TV before switching it on. 3. Using your remote, press the [INPUT] button and select the corresponding HDMI input. EXTERNAL DEVICES TV PORT I M D H HDMI Cable I M D H DVD Set-top Box NOTES Because the HDMI connector provides video and audio signals, it is not necessary to connect an audio cable. We strongly recommend to use HDMI Cable with 2 cores as shown in the figure. 6 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting an MHL-Enabled device You can connect an MHL-enabled device, such as a cell phone, and view the screen of your device on the TV. 1. Connect one end of an HDMI-to-MHL cable (not provided) to the micro USB port on the device. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HDMI /
MHL port. 3. Select the corresponding source from the TV. TV PORT I M D H L H M HDMI-to-MHL Cable EXTERNAL DEVICE Cell Phone NOTES This feature may be unavailable on some TV series. We strongly recommend to use MHL Cable with 2 core as shown in the figure. Connecting a headphone You can connect headphone (not provided) to the AUDIO OUT port on your TV. While the headphone is connected, the sound from the built-in speakers will be disabled. TV PORT
/
AUDIO OUT EXTERNAL DEVICE Headphone Connecting speakers or other audio receivers To connect speakers or other audio receivers with an audio cable (not provided):
1. Use an audio cable to connect the digital audio in port of the audio receiver device to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT port of the TV. Another option is to use an RCA Y-cable (1/8-stereo mini to L/R phono) to connect an analog sound system to the AUDIO OUT port of the TV. 2. Plug the connected devices into the main power socket before switching on the TV. TV PORTS DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Audio Cable EXTERNAL DEVICES
/
AUDIO OUT Audio Cable Red(R) White(L) Digital Sound Bar Audio Amplifier Powerless Bass Speaker Speaker TIP: If you prefer to use Audio Return Channel, then see Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel
(ARC) on page 8. NOTES surround sound When a digital audio system is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT port, decrease the TV and system volume. 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the TV is connected to an external device that supports a 5.1 channel You can receive 5.1 channel audio in one of two ways. The first way is to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT port from the device to the Amplifier. The second way is to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT port on the back of the TV to the Optical port on the Amplifier.After youve completed one of the two methods then be sure to go into the Advanced Audio Settings of the TV and select RAW to receive the 5.1 channel audio. You will need to also go into the sound or audio settings of your device to ensure it is set to 5.1 Channel output. It may read Bitstream, RAW or Digital. 7 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting a digital sound bar to use Audio Return Channel (ARC) If youd like to use the Audio Return Channel (ARC) feature to have sound sent from the TV back down an HDMI cable to a digital sound bar, then you will need to connect the cable to the HDMI / ARC port. By using this feature, you will also be able to control the sound bar with your TV remote instead of having to use multiple remotes for each device. To connect a digital sound bar with an HDMI cable (not provided):
1. Connect the cable thats attached to the sound bar to the HDMI / ARC port on the TV. 2. Turn on the sound bar by pressing the Power button. 3. Press the [
] button on your remote and press the [ > ] button of your remote to display the Settings Menu, go to System > HDMI Function. 4. Turn on the CEC&MHL Control setting. 5. Return the Settings Menu by re-pressing the [BACK] button. 6. Select Sound > Advanced Audio Settings. 7. Go to the section of the screen that reads TV Speaker & ARC and select ARC First. NOTES Only digital sound bars that require a wired connection are compatible with the TV. If the device has an Input Selector feature then make sure to change it to TV. TV PORT EXTERNAL DEVICE I M D H C R A HDMI Cable I M D H Digital Sound Bar Connecting a USB device You can connect the USB devices such as hard drives, USB sticks and digital cameras for browsing photos, listening music and watching recorded movies. 1. Connect a USB device into the USB port. 2. Select the Media type on the Media screen or Home screen. For more information, see Media on page 25. NOTES TV PORTS USB USB EXTERNAL DEVICE DC 5V 1A(MAX) DC 5V 0.5A(MAX) When connecting a hard disk or a USB hub, always connect the mains adapter of the connected device to the power supply. Exceeding a total current consumption may result in damage. The USB1.1 and USB2.0 devices maximum current consumption are 500mA. The USB3.0 device maximum current consumption is 1A. For individual non-standard high-capacity mobile hard disk, if its impulse current is greater than or equal 1A, it may cause TV-rebooting or self-locking. So the TV does not support it. The USB port supports a voltage of 5V. 8 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting Your TV to a Wireless or Wired Network You have the option to connect your TV to a wireless or wired network to access the Internet. For more information about the network settings on TV, see Network Menu on page 20. Connecting to a wireless network Our built-in wireless LAN adapter supports the IEEE 802.11 ac/b/g/n communication protocols and we recommend that you use an IEEE 802.11n or IEEE 802.11ac router. When you play a video over an IEEE 802.11 b/g connection, the video may not play smoothly. Wireless Router The LAN Port on the Wall Wireless Adapter built-in the TV set LAN Cable NOTES You must use the SHARP built-in Wireless LAN Adapter to use a wireless network because the set does not support an external USB network adapter. To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. If the wireless IP sharer supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. If Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11N mode is selected and the Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixed) for your Access Point (AP), then the SHARP TV will not support a connection in compliance with these Wi-Fi certification specifications. If your access point (AP) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can connect to the network via Push Button Configuration (PBC) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. 9 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Connecting to a wired (Ethernet) network You can attach your TV to your LAN in one of the three following ways:
Option 1 You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external modem using a Cat 5 LAN cable. See the illustration below. TV PORT External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) The Modem Port on the Wall LAN Ethernet Cable Modem Cable Option 2 You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use an Ethernet cable for the connection. See the illustration below. TV PORT IP Sharer (Router)
(with DHCP server) External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) The Modem Port on the Wall LAN Ethernet Cable Ethernet Cable Modem Cable Option 3 Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet with an Ethernet cable. See the diagram below. The LAN Port on the Wall TV PORT LAN Ethernet Cable If you have a Dynamic Network, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS, so you dont have to enter them manually. Most home networks are Dynamic Networks. Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually on your TVs Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). NOTE You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use static IP addresses. 10 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Using Your TV Remote Control Buttons on your TV remote Infrared transmitter Power on / off INPUT Change TV input source Enter Channels / input numbers Turn Closed Caption On / Off CC The Gear button for the Quick setup menu D-pad (up/down/left/right navigation buttons) OK Return to the previous place in the menu or app BACK EXIT Dash button Select a digital sub-channel Special function buttons All Apps Confirm button Display the Home screen Exit the application Live TV Volume (up / down) VOL CH Channel (up / down) Mute and restore sound Media content control function buttons Adjust Sleep timer setting SLEEP Quick access buttons to apps Remote control range information The remote control can work at a distance of up to 26 feet in front of the TV set. It can work at a 30 degree horizontal or vertical angle. 11 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Begin using your remote 1. Slide the back cover to open the battery compartment of the remote control. 1 2 3 2. Insert two AAA size batteries. Make sure to match the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries with the (+) and (-) ends indicated in the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery compartment cover. NOTES Discard batteries in a designated disposal area. Do not throw them into a fire. Remove old batteries immediately to prevent them from leaking into the battery compartment. If you do not intend to use the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries. Battery chemicals can cause a rash. If the batteries leak, clean the battery compartment with a cloth. If chemicals touch your skin then wash it immediately. Do not mix old and new batteries. Do not mix alkaline, standard (carbon-zinc) or rechargeable (NiCd, NiMH, etc.) batteries. Do not continue using the remote if it gets warm or hot. Call our Support Center immediately on the SHARP support website. Program your universal cable or satellite remote control to operate your new sharp television
(only for USA) If you would like to program your other household remote controls to your new SHARP television,please refer to the Users Manual supplied by your Cable or Satellite provider. The Cable or Satellite providers Users Manuals should include instructions on how to program their remote to your television. A list of SHARP codes for the most common Cable and Satellite providers are listed below. Use the SHARP code that is associated with your Cable or Satellite provider (if applicable). DIRECTV 0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable 386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 Comcast 0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications 0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network 505, 627, 538, 720, 659 If the SHARP code associated with your Cable or Satellite provider is not listed, does not work or you cannot locate the instructions to program your remote, call your local Cable or Satellite providers customer service center. If your Cable or Satellite provider does not have a SHARP code available, please contact us. Using your cable set-top box or satellite receiver remote as a universal remote If you prefer to use your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote, then visit the Support page to view a list of the codes. 12 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Completing the First-Time Setup Menu
]] button on the remote to turn on the TV. Press the [
After the splash screen that displays the SHARP logo appears, begin the first-time setup menu. Screen Task LANGUAGE AND LOCATION Language English Country United States Time Zone Eastern Language Terms Mode Network Input Done TERMS OF SERVICE Accept all The EULA and Terms must be accepted in order to cont inue. Accept EULA Accept Terms of... Language Terms Mode Network Input Done TV USAGE MODE TV Mode Home Home Mode In Home Mode, your TV will automat ically adjust the brightness of your screen based on the ambient light in the room. This mode uses less energy. Language Terms Mode Network Input Done 13 1. Using the D-pad arrows of your remote, choose your Language, Country and Time Zone. 2. Navigate to the Forward arrow and press [OK]. TIP: The edge of the drop-down boxes and the back and forward arrows change to blue when you select them. 1. Press [OK] on your remote to select Accept All. 2. When youre done, then navigate to the Forward arrow and press
[OK]. Select Home (which appears by default) and then navigate to the Forward arrow to press [OK]. NOTE Store Mode should only be selected by Retailers who plan to demonstrate the TV. ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Screen NETWORK CONNECTION Task If your TV does not automatically detect an Ethernet connection, then select WiFi. When youre done, select your network from the list that displays and move to the next screen. Select how you receive your TV channels. Choose from one of the following sources below and then move to the next screen. TV AV COMPONENT HDMI NOTE If you use an antenna to receive channels, then you must complete the first-time setup menu in order to run a channel scan. Press the [OK] button on your remote if you are fine with the selections that appear on the screen. Otherwise, navigate to the back arrow on the screen to change your selection. Ethernet WiFi Select a Network A2F4-05 A3F6-01 A6F5-19 A1F2-02 A2F4-03 A2F5-01 R22 Language Terms Mode Network Input Done LIVE TV INPUT SOURCE TV AV COMPONENT HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 Language Terms Mode Network Input Done CONGRATULATIONS!
Your TV is now ready to use English United States Eastern Home Mode WiFi TV OK Language Terms Mode Network Input Done 14 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Shortcuts Instructions You can use shortcuts on the remote control for fast operation. Turning your TV on or off To turn your TV on:
1. Connect the power cord to the back of the TV, then plug the power cord into an AC outlet. 2. When the TV is powered on, press the [
To turn your TV off, press the [
] button on the remote to turn TV.
] button on the remote. NOTES plug from the AC outlet. When your TV is in standby mode, it is still consuming power. To completely disconnect power, please remove the If your TV does not receive an input signal for several minutes, it automatically goes into standby mode. Selecting the input source Select the Input Source depending on the video device you have connected to your TV. To select the input source:
1. Turn on your TV, then press the [INPUT] button on the remote, the list of Source appears. 2. Press the [< / >] buttons to select the input source. 3. Press the [OK] button to confirm your selection. Using the Live TV To view broadcast programs, press the [Live TV] button on your remote. Channel search guide When you select TV as input, if no TV channels were saved before, you will be prompted to do a channel search. Before channel tuning could start, you must specify the Tuner Mode, Antenna or Cable. You can also go to Setting menu >
Channel to change the channel settings. Launch Live TV After channel tuning is done for the first time, the screen will display Live TV operating tips, including: how to start the channel list, how to start channel info and so on. OK View channel info BACK PRE-CH
[OK] Show channel list
[ v ] View channel info
[BACK] View recent channel OK Show channel list 15 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Viewing channel information As you use the [CH+ / CH-] button on your remote to scroll through channels, an information banner appears on the top of the screen. 1 2 3 4 5 5-2 AT05-2 12:09 AM Thu. 30 Jun. 6 7 Antenna AT05 480i 10:00 PM 1:00 AM 1:00 AM - 4:00 AM AT05 480i 1/1 unknown 5.1CH 4:3 480i CC 8 9 10 The information banner displays the following information:
1. Channel number 2. Lock status 3. Input 4. Program name 5. Show identification 6. Channel name 7. Current date and time 8. Prompt 9. Beginning and end time of the next program 10. Start/Stop time progress bar of the current program If you are watching a particular channel, you can also press the up arrow button of your remote to view channel information. Viewing a channel list After you have done an automatic channel scan (if youre using an antenna) or are receiving your channels through a cable provider, you can view your list of channels by pressing [OK] on your remote. You will see the channel list display on the right side of the screen. Creating a Favorites List To quickly access your most-watched channels, you can create a Favorites List. To create your Favorites List:
1. Press the [
2. Press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. 3. Select Channel > Favorites List. 4. Using the [ v / v ] buttons of your remote, select a channel and press [OK] button. A heart-shaped indicator will appear beside the channel as confirmation that it has been successfully added.
] button on your remote. Viewing your Favorite list To view channels that youve added to your Favorites List simply press [OK] on your remote to call out the channel list. The channel list appears on the right side of the screen and heart-shaped icons are shown next to the channels that make up your Favorites List. You can press [ < / > ] buttons to switch the channel list (Antenna or Cable) and Favorite list. 16 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Basic Settings Your SHARP TV comes with many TV setting features to allow you to customize the picture based on your viewing preference and environment. As you navigate throughout different screens to access settings, some of the indicators indicator signifies a feature that is appear as words On and Off and some are open disabled. symbols. An and closed
] button to access the Quick Settings Menu, then press the [ > ] button on the D-pad to view the Using the Settings Menu You can press the [
Settings Menu. The Settings Menu consists of the following settings:
Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV In each menu, you can:
Press the [ v / v ] buttons to select an item. Press the [OK] buttons to enter the submenu. Press the [ < / > ] buttons to adjust the value. Press the [BACK] button to return to the previous menu. Press the [EXIT] button to exit the menu. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Picture Mode Standard Brightness 50 Contrast 50 Color 50 Aspect Ratio Auto Backlight Advanced Picture Settings Restore Defaults 17 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Picture Mode Standard Brightness 50 Contrast 50 Color 50 Aspect Ratio Auto Backlight Picture Menu Picture Mode: If youd like to configure the settings for your picture, then there are six types of picture modes available: Vivid, Standard, Theater, Energy Saving, Game and Sport. Restore Defaults Advanced Picture Settings Once you choose the mode, you can adjust the picture based on the following settings:
Brightness: Adjust the Brightness level to generate lighter or darker images. Contrast: Adjust the Contrast level to increase or decrease how bright images appear. Color: Adjust the color intensity of the picture for a more vibrant image. Aspect Ratio: Adjust the Aspect Ratio to stretch or zoom in on your picture. You can choose from the following settings: Normal, Zoom, Wide, Cinema, 1:1 PIXEL MAP, Panoramic, Direct or Auto. Backlight: Some models have a Dynamic Backlight Control setting that you can turn Off and set to High or Low. Some models have a Local Dimming setting is available that will enable the TV to automatically adjust the backlight by sections according to the changes in image and increase the contrast. The Backlight setting enables you to adjust how bright you want images to appear. In addition, an ECO Sensor setting is available that will enable the TV to automatically adjust the picture settings according to the amount of ambient light in your room. The Minimum Backlight setting enables you to adjust how bright you want images to appear. This is a money-saving feature because it reduces power consumption. Advanced Picture Settings: Adjust advanced picture settings based on your viewing preference. Display: Adjust advanced picture settings in the component source. Overscan: Change the video size settings slightly crop the edges of the displayed image. Tint: Adjust the colors from a green to magenta tint to view the natural skin tones of people on the screen. Sharpness: Adjust how sharp or soft edges of images appear. Ultra Smooth Motion: This setting minimizes afterimages that are left on the screen when viewing fast-moving objects. You can adjust it from Off, Clear, Standard or Smooth. A Smooth setting will produce a smoother picture whereas a Clear setting will result in a picture that has less judder (shaking). NOTE Some models dont support this function. Noise Reduction: Improve how clear the picture appears by reducing noise. Adaptive Contrast: Automatically darken dark areas and lighten light areas of images to see more details. Color Temperature: Select a preset color temperature. White Balance: Adjust the intensity of red, green and blue lights to view the true colors of all images in the picture. Color Tuner: Adjust the Hue, Saturation and Brightness of color settings. Restore Defaults: Restore all the picture settings in the current picture mode to the factory default values. 18 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Sound Menu Sound Mode: Select a preset sound mode to suit the type of content you are listening to: Standard, Theater, Music, Speech and Late Night. Once you choose the mode, you can adjust the audio based on the following settings:
Audio Enhancements: dbx-tvs Total Technology delivers the best possible TV sound for your TV. Total Sonics: Optimizes overall sound quality by increasing bass, making dialog clear and natural, and widening the sound field. Sound Mode Standard Audio Enhancements Advanced Audio Settings Restore Defaults Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Total Surround: Provides surround sound experience with psycho-acoustic processing to place sounds beside, behind, and above the viewer. For best results use with Total Sonics. Total Volume: Maintains consistent loudness levels from wide dynamic range programs, too-loud commercials, and channel or input changes. Advanced Audio Settings: Tune the audio settings and quality of the TV. Equalizer: Boost the volume at different frequencies. Lip Sync: Synchronize the displayed image with the audio output. Balance: Adjust the left and right speaker strength to optimize audio for a specific location. Digital Audio Out: Select the digital audio output format that best suits the audio device type. For example, choose RAW (which is uncompressed audio in RAW form) if you have 5.1 Channel Surround Sound Speaker set up. Choose PCM if you have an amplifier that does not support Dolby Digital technology. Digital Audio Delay: Adjust the digital audio output delay time to sync sound from an external speaker with the images on the TV. TV Speaker & ARC: Select the TV speaker or an external speaker for sound output. Audio Out: Change the way audio is sent through the type of device thats connected to your TV Audio Out port. Restore Defaults: Restore all of the audio settings in current audio mode to the factory default values. Channel Menu Tuner Mode: Select if you receive TV channels over the air (antenna) or through a cable set top box as the input will be used during a channel scan. Auto Channel Scan: Automatically scan for channels to view programming from your TV source. Channel Skip: Skip a channel that your TV picked up during a previous channel scan search. Favorites List: Quickly access your most-watched channels by creating a Favorites list. Tuner Mode Antenna Auto Channel Scan Channel Skip Favorites List Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV 19 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Network Menu Network Configuration: Set up the network to gain full access of Smart TV features. When the Connection Type is Ethernet, means you choose a wired network connection to access the Internet. Ethernet: Display the network connection status. IP Setting Mode: Configure the IP setting for your network connection. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Network Configuration Network Information Disconnected Anyview Stream On TV Name Smart TV When the Connection Type is Wireless, means you choose a wireless network connection to access the Internet. Advanced Settings: Configure the advanced wireless network settings for the TV. Available Networks: Select an available network to connect. And you can also add wireless network or refresh wireless network. When the Connection Type is Off, means you turn off the Internet connection. Network Information: View information about your network connection. Anyview Stream: Share video, music or other content files from another device to your TV screen. TV Name: Choose a name for your TV. The name will be shown to devices that are available for sharing data. System Menu Location: Choose the location from where you will watch your TV. Time: Set the current time based on your location. Time Zone: Select your time zone. Time Format: Set the time to display in a 12 or 24-hour format. Daylight Savings: Select whether to apply Daylight Savings Time to the TV. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV Location USA Time Language Parental Controls Application Settings Closed Caption HDMI Function Advanced Settings Date/Time: Set the Date and Time. Power On Timer: Enable the Power On Timer to Off, Once or Daily. Power Off Timer: Enable the Power Off Timer to Off, Once or Daily. Sleep Timer: Set the sleep timer to automatically turn the TV Off within a specified time: Off, 10 Minutes, 20 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 40 Minutes, 50 Minutes, 60 Minutes, 90 Minutes and 120 Minutes. Language: Adjust the Menu Language and Preferred Audio Language for the TV. Parental Controls: Turn On Parental Controls to block children from being able to view certain programs. The default password is 0000. For more information about Parental Controls, See Parental Controls on page 22. Application Settings: Set settings for apps on your TV. Netflix: Remove this TV from your Netflix account. Please contact Netflix if you want to stop being billed for you service. ESN: Display the Netflix Electronic Serial Number. VUDU: Remove this TV from your VUDU account. Please contact VUDU if you want to stop being billed for you service. 20 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Closed Caption: Adjust Closed Captioning settings. Analog Caption: Select an Analog Caption setting from Off, CC1-CC4, Text 1-TEXT4. CC1-CC4: Closed captioning appears in a small banner across the bottom of the screen. CC1 is usually the printed version of the audio. CC2-CC4 display content are provided by the broadcaster. Text1-Text4: Closed captioning that covers half or all of the screen. Text1-Text4 display content are provided by the broadcaster. Off: To turn off the Analog Caption. Digital Caption: Select a Digital Caption setting: Off, CS1-CS6. Digital CC Settings: There are two caption styles. One is the Automatic function set as the broadcaster, while the other is the Custom style where you can adjust the Size, Font, Text Color, Text Opacity, Background Color etc. HDMI Function: Configure how to control CEC-enabled devices with your TV remote. CEC & MHL Control: Allow HDMI devices to control each other. Device Auto Power Off: Automatically turn off HDMI CEC devices when the TV is turned off . TV Auto Power On: Allow the TV to turn On with CEC-enabled devices. Device Connect: Allow CEC-enabled devices to communicate with each other when connected through an HDMI cable. CEC Device Lists: View a list of all CEC-enabled devices. NOTES HDMI cables must be used to connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV. The HDMI CEC feature of the connected device must be turned on. If you connect an HDMI device that is not HDMI CEC-compatible, all the HDMI-CEC Control features do not work. Depending on the connected HDMI device, the HDMI-CEC Control feature may not work. Advanced Settings: Access the Advanced Settings menu. Menu Timeout: Set the amount of time that youd like for the menu to display : 10s, 20s , 30s , 60s or Off. Use Mode: Set the TV to use in Home or Store Mode (Some models have a Store Mode with 4K Video). Input Labels: Edit the input labels. Default LiveTV Source: Select the default input selected by the remote control Live TV button. Setup Wizard: Use the Setup Wizard for instructions to help you set up your TV. Power Indicator: Set the Power Indicator to illuminate when the TV is turned off. About TV Menu System Information: View system information. Legal Disclaimer: Read the Legal Disclaimer. Auto Firmware Upgrade: Set your TV to automatically receive the latest firmware. Check Firmware Upgrade: Check to ensure that your TV has received the latest firmware. Restore To Factory Default: Restore your TV back to the factory default. Settings Picture Sound Channel Network System About TV System Information Legal Disclaimer Auto Firmware Upgrade On Check Firmware Upgrade Restore To Factory Default 21 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Parental Controls The Parental Controls setting allows you to block content that is not appropriate for children to watch. You can do this by creating a 4-digit password. The factory-default password is 0000.
] button on your remote. Turning Parental Controls On 1. Press the [
2. Press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. 3. Select System > Parental Controls. 4. Press the [OK] button on your remote, an Enter PIN window displays. Using the numerical keypad on your remote, enter the factory-default password 0000 and press [OK]. 5. Go to Locks. 6. Press the [OK] button to turn the locks On. You will see the other Parental Control settings change from a greyed out state and become highlighted. When this occurs, begin adding other settings to the Block Time, Channel Block, Program Block, Input Block, Change PIN or Restore Parental Control Defaults features. Block Time: Block certain channels and programs during certain periods of time. Channel Block: Block programs by channels when you turn on the Parental Controls feature. Program Block: Block programs according to their TV or MPAA (movie) rating when you have turned on the Parental Controls feature and selected that rating to be blocked. Input Block: Block content from devices that are connected to certain TV ports. Change PIN: Change your PIN that you use to access Parental Controls. If you want to change your parental control password, first enter the new password then enter the same password again. NOTE If you forget your password, call the SHARP Consumer Electronics Care Center. Restore Parental Control Defaults: Restore Parental Controls back to the factory setting. Description of U.S. TV Ratings Content Defined as A D L S V FV All Suggestive dialog Course or crude language Sexual situations Violence Fantasy Violence Description of Age-based Ratings Age TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA Defined as All children Directed to older children General audience Parental Guidance Suggested Parents strongly cautioned Mature Audiences Only 22 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL U.S. Movie Ratings Rating G PG PG-13 R NC-17 X Defined as General audience Parental Guidance suggested Parents strongly cautioned Restricted No one 17 and under permitted A rating that has now been superseded by NC-17 Canadian English Ratings Defined as Rating Children C Children 8 years and older C8+
General programming that is suitable for all audiences G Parental Guidance PG Viewers 14 years and older 14+
Adult Programming 18+
8ans+
Canadian French Ratings Defined as Rating General (appropriate for all ages and must contain little to no violence or sexual content) G General but inadvisable for young children(could contain scenes disturbing to children under eight). Recommended for viewing with parent. Programming is appropriate for children 13 and older and may contain moderate violence, language and some sexual situations. Recommended for children 16 and older and may contain strong violence, language and sexual content. Programming intended for viewers that are 18 and older. Programming may contain extreme violence and graphic sexual content/pornography. 13ans+
16ans+
18ans+
NOTE All ratings that are higher than those you select are also blocked. For example, if you choose to block the PG-13 rating, then the higher ratings (R and NC-17) are automatically blocked too. 23 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Advanced TV Settings Getting familiar with the Home screen The simple design of the Home screen menu makes it easy to navigate. It serves as the central location to access Top Apps, Recommendation, History, Media, Apps or Inputs on the back of the TV that youve connected external devices to. To access the Home screen, press the [
your selection.
] button on your remote control and use the arrows on the D-pad to make Indicators and Icons on the top of the Home screen You can always view the current time in the top right corner of the Home screen. If your TV is connected to the Internet through a wireless connection, then an icon will display in the top right corner of the screen. This location makes it very convenient for you to determine if you still have Internet connectivity as you use the TV. If your TV is connected to the Internet, then the weather current conditions will display in the top right conner of the screen. In addition, if you have connected a device (such as a thumb drive) to a USB port and your TV recognizes it, then a device icon will also display in the same area. Names of sections that appear on the Home screen The Home screen displays the following section names:
Top Apps Recommendation History Inputs Media Apps Inputs Each time you access the Home screen, the icons for your inputs will display on the screen. Inputs that you have connected an external device to will be highlighted. Inputs that do not have an external device connected to are greyed out. 24 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Media Media is a central location for you to view or listen to different types of content (for example, your photos, music and movies) through the following methods:
A USB thumb drive or hard drive Compatible mobile phone, tablet or other personal device: You can stream movies, music and photos that are stored on Compatible personal device and play or view the content on your TV. When you connect your thumb drive or other personal device to the TV, the TV automatically detects it and displays a device icon in the top right corner of the Home screen. Panels that appear on the Media screen The Media screen displays four panels: Picture, Video, Music and All. File formats that may be supported Due to differences in programming tools and other factors, some of the file formats that are listed may or may not NOTE be supported. Medium File Format Video Picture Music
.avi (MPEG2, Divx), .mkv (Divx), .mpeg (MPEG2), .wmv (Divx, XviD)
.JPG
.mp3 Browsing Content To browse through content based on the type that you wish to access:
1. Navigate to the appropriate menu tab on the left side of the screen and select Music, Video, Picture or All. The library of items displays on the right side of the screen. 2. Navigate to the right side of the screen and click on the name of the folder that contains your content. 3. Make your selection to play or view the content. If you want to close out of the Media center, then press the [EXIT] button on your remote. Viewing Pictures as a Slideshow To view pictures in a slideshow:
1. Navigate to the Picture tab. 2. Click on Start the Slideshow. The slideshow of your pictures begins to play. To stop the slideshow, press the [OK] button on your remote and press it again to restart it. Viewing Video While viewing video you will see a number of icons appear at the bottom of the screen. You can use the navigation buttons of your remote to select these icons that will control the video. 25 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Apps Numerous factory-installed apps are available for you to choose from for your entertainment preferences. Installing an App Even though your TV has numerous factory-installed apps, there may be others that youd like to download. To install an app:
1. From the Home screen, click on the Opera TV Store icon. 2. Navigate to the Search tab at the top of the screen. 3. Begin typing the name of the app. As you begin typing the first two to three letters the Opera Store suggests words to quicken your search time. 4. Use the navigation buttons of your remote to select the app. A page displays that shows a written description of the app. 5. Click on OPEN or ADD TO FAVORITES. Removing an App You can only delete apps that youve downloaded to the TV. Factory-installed apps can not be deleted. To delete an app:
1. From the Apps screen, click on the Edit icon. 2. Use the navigation buttons on your remote to select the app that you want to remove. The app which has a icon at the upper right conner can be removed. 3. Press the [OK] button on your remote. A dialog message displays that asks if youre sure you want to remove the 4. Click on OK. A confirmation message displays and the icon is removed from the Apps list screen. NOTE app. NOTE If an app is deleted,the information related to that app is also removed. 5. Use the navigation buttons to select the Complete icon. Moving App Icons around Apps can not be moved around on the screen. Customizing the name of your TV If you have several TVs in your home then you may want to customize the name of your TV. By giving your TV a name, it will make it easier for you to identify it when connecting devices to the TV to stream or mirror content. To customize the name of your TV:
1. Press the [
2. Press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. 3. Go to Network > TV Name. 4. Select User Input to bring up the keyboard and begin typing the name. 5. When you are finished, power off the TV and power it back on for the change to take effect.
] button on your remote. 26 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Using Anyview Cast to mirror content from your device to the TV screen The Anyview Cast is an app that enables you to share (or cast) a video, audio or image from your Android-based device to the TV. From your tablet or phone To mirror content from your tablet or phone to the TV:
1. Using your remote, press the [
> Network Configuration and select Wireless. 2. Press the [
3. Turn on the wireless display function on your Android-based device.
] button on your remote and select the Anyview Cast app.
] button, then press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. Go to Network Some Android-based devices may not support casting. 4. Find your TV in the list of devices that displays and select it. 5. Wait for the Creating Connection progress bar to complete on the TV screen and the video or image will display in a NOTE moment. 27 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Software updates for your TV The software (also referred to as firmware) is part of what powers your TV. We will provide software updates to continuously enhance your TV and correct any issues that may impact your user experience; therefore, we recommend that you keep your TV connected to the Internet to automatically receive updates when they are available. You can choose to receive updates automatically or check for software updates and install them manually. NOTE While your TV is updating, please dont interrupt the progress (including turn off the Internet connection or the TV). Checking for updates automatically In order for your TV to receive software notification updates automatically, it must be turned On and connected to the Internet. The Auto Firmware Upgrade setting (which enables your TV to receive the updates automatically) is turned to On by factory default. NOTE While your TV is on and checking for updates, the program that you are watching will not be interrupted. Disabling the Auto Firmware Upgrade feature If you do not want your TV to automatically check for updates and to receive notifications when they are available, then:
1. Using your remote, press the [
2. Press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. 3. Go to About TV > Auto Firmware Upgrade and turn the feature Off. By doing this, you will have to manually check to see if you have the latest software update.
] button.
] button. Checking for the latest firmware To manually check for the latest firmware:
1. Using your remote, press the [
2. Press the [ > ] button to display the Settings Menu. 3. Go to About TV > Check Firmware Upgrade. Manually installing software updates If you turned the Auto Firmware Upgrade feature Off then youll need to manually install the software. 1. If the Check Firmware Upgrade screen shows there is the latest version, select the Update icon. 2. After the software downloaded, select the OK icon to start the update progress. 28 ENGLISH FRANAIS ESPAOL Quick Problem-Solving Tips When you experience an issue with your TV, turn it off and on again. If this does not resolve the problem, then refer to the tips below. If the problem is still not resolved, then contact us. POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS ISSUES Check if the power cord is plugged into a powered AC outlet. Press the [
] button on the remote control to activate the unit from Standby No sound or picture mode. I have connected an external source to my TV and I get no picture and/or sound When I turn on my TV, there is a delay for a few seconds before the picture appears. Is this normal?
The picture is normal but there is no sound Sound but no picture or black and white picture The sound and/or picture is distorted or appears wavy The sound and picture is blurry or cuts out A horizontal or vertical stripe appears on the picture and/or the picture is shaking The plastic cabinet makes a clicking type of sound The remote control does not work Check to see if the LED light is on or not. If it is, then the TV is receiving power. Check for the correct output connection on the external source and for the correct input connection on the TV. Make sure you have made the correct selection for the input mode for the incoming signal. Yes, this is normal. The TV is initializing and searching for previous setting information. Check the volume settings. Check if Mute mode is set to On. If the picture is black and white, unplug the TV from the AC outlet and replug it after 60 seconds. Check that the Color is set to 50 or higher. Try different TV channels. An electric appliance may be affecting the TV. Turn off any appliances that are nearby and move it farther away from the TV. Insert the power plug of the TV set into another power outlet. If using an external antenna, check the direction, position and connection of the antenna. Adjust the direction of your antenna or reset or fine tune the channel. Check if there is an appliance or electric tool nearby that is causing interference. The click sound can occur when the temperature of the television changes. This change causes the television cabinet to expand or contract, which makes the sound. This is normal and the TV is OK. Confirm that TV still has power and is operational. Change the batteries in the remote control. Check if the batteries are correctly installed. NOTE For usage in Mexico , operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions : 1 ) it is possible that this device doesnt cause any detrimental interference and 2 ) this device must take any kind of interference, including that which may cause its malfunctioning. 29 ENGLISH
1 | User Manual 6 | Users Manual | 4.68 MiB |
MANUEL DUTILISATION Avant dutiliser le tlviseur, veuillez lire attentivement le prsent manuel et le conserver pour une utilisation ultrieure. FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Dclaration de Droit dAuteur 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. Tous Droits Rservs. Toutes les informations contenues dans ce manuel dutilisateur sont la proprit de Hisense Company Ltd. et de ses filiales. Elles sont protges par le copyright et/ou dautres lois de proprit intellectuelle internationales et des TATS-
UNIS. La reproduction ou transmission des documents, en tout ou partie, de quelque manire que ce soit, lectronique, imprime, ou autre, sans le consentement pralablement crit de Hisense Company Ltd. est une violation des droits de Hisense Company Ltd. en vertu des lois susmentionnes. Aucune partie de cette publication ne doit tre stocke, reproduite, transmise ou distribue, en tout ou partie, de quelque manire ue ce soit, lectronique ou autre, tarife ou pas, ou autre, ou sans contrepartie, sans la permission pralablement crite de Hisense Company Ltd. Les demandes dautorisation pour stocker, reproduire, transmettre ou distribuer des matriaux peuvent tre adresses lune des adresses suivantes :
TATS-UNIS :
CANADA :
MEXIQUE :
Sharp , Aquos , Quattron et tous les autres logos, slogans, marques ou noms de produits Sharp sont des marques dposes de Sharp Corporation. Hisense , et tous les autres logos, slogans, marques ou noms de produits Hisense sont des marques dposes de Hisense Company Ltd. et de ses filiales. Ce produit vous est vendu sous un ou plusieurs accords de licence entre Sharp Corporation et Hisense International
(Hong Kong) Amrique Investment Co. Ltd. Toutes les autres marques sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Hisense USA Corporation PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. 1 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Page de Non-Responsabilit
**Nonobstant toute disposition contraire, y compris pour une ou toutes les descriptions, reprsentations, dclarations ou autres communications relatives ce dispositif Sharp, Aquos ou Quattron (ci-aprs dnomm le dispositif) ralises sous quelque forme que ce soit et tout moment, tous les services ou une partie des services dapplications pr-installs ou installs conscutivement peuvent ne pas tre disponibles ou en mesure de fonctionner comme prvu par le fournisseur des services dapplications pour tous les domaines ou une partie des domaines dutilisation pour des raisons hors du contrle des concdants de licence ou du fabricant de ce dispositif, y compris, mais sans sy limiter, laccs Internet, les limitations de services locaux, etc. Tout achat ou utilisation de lAppareil, y compris les Services dApplication, est entirement aux risques de lutilisateur. Les Services dApplication sont fournis sur une base selon la disponibilit, sans garantie daucune sorte, expresse ou implicite, que le Service dApplication soit ininterrompu ou sans erreur, y compris mais sans sy limiter, des caprices du temps, des interruptions de Service, des catastrophes naturelles, des garanties de titre, des limitations locales ou rgionales, aucune infraction, NI DES GARANTIES IMPLIQUES DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE OU DE CONFORMIT POUR UN USAGE PARTICULIER. Aucun conseil ou information donne par les concdants de licence ou les fabricants, socits affilies, ou contractuels ou leurs employs respectifs ne peut crer une telle garantie. Tous les concdants de licence et le fabricant de ce dispositif, conjointement et sparment, dclinent expressment toute responsabilit pour le fonctionnement de tout ou dune partie des services dapplication tout moment. Par lachat de ce dispositif, vous acceptez une telle dclaration sans aucune prtention sur les concdants de licence et le fabricant. Vous tes seul responsable de la fourniture dun actif et dune connexion Internet fonctionnelle, ainsi que de tout le matriel et/ou logiciel ncessaires pour utiliser le dispositif comme prvu. Avertissement :
Les images dans le prsent document sont uniquement fournies titre indicatif et peuvent tre diffrentes du produit rel. 2 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Table des Matires Table des Matires .............................................................................................3 Connexion dappareils votre tlviseur ........................................................5 Connexion dune antenne, dun rcepteur cble ou dun rcepteur satellite ............................5 Connexion dun rcepteur satellite, dun lecteur DVD ou autre appareil Audio Visuel (AV) avec un cble vido composite (Jaune / Rouge / Blanc) ..........................................................5 Connexion dun appareil AV avec un cble vido composante (Rouge / Bleu / Vert) ..........6 Connexion dun appareil AV avec un cble HDMI ....................................................................6 Connecter un priphrique compatible MHL ............................................................................7 Connecter un casque ................................................................................................................7 Connecter des enceintes externes ou dautres rcepteurs audio .............................................7 Connexion dune barre de son numrique pour utiliser la Chaine de Retour Audio (ARC) ......8 Connexion dun priphrique USB ............................................................................................8 Connecter votre tlviseur un rseau Wi-Fi ou filaire .................................9 Connexion un rseau Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................9 Connexion un rseau filaire (Ethernet) ..................................................................................10 Utiliser votre tlcommande ...........................................................................11 Touches de votre tlcommande ............................................................................................11 Informations sur la Gamme de Tlcommandes .....................................................................11 Commencez utiliser votre tlcommande.............................................................................12 Effectuer la configuration initiale ...................................................................13 Instructions des raccourcis ............................................................................15 Allumer ou teindre votre tlviseur.........................................................................................15 Slection de la source .............................................................................................................15 Utilisation de la Live TV ............................................................................................................15 Rglages de base .............................................................................................17 Utilisation du menu Rglages ..................................................................................................17 Menu Image .............................................................................................................................18 Menu Audio ..............................................................................................................................19 Menu Chanes ..........................................................................................................................19 Menu Rseau ...........................................................................................................................20 Menu Systme .........................................................................................................................20 propos du menu TV ..............................................................................................................21 Contrle parental .....................................................................................................................22 3 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Rglages avancs du tlviseur .....................................................................24 Se familiariser avec lcran daccueil.......................................................................................24 Intrants .....................................................................................................................................24 Mdia .......................................................................................................................................25 Applications .............................................................................................................................26 Utiliser Anyview Cast pour reproduire du contenu de votre priphrique mobile sur lcran de votre tlviseur .........................................................................................................................27 Mises jour du logiciel de votre tlviseur ..............................................................................28 Rapides Conseils de Rsolution de Problmes ............................................29 4 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connexion dappareils votre tlviseur Il existe diffrentes options pour connecter votre tlviseur diffrents appareils. La mthode par laquelle vous connectez sera base sur le type de cbles dont vous disposez et des sorties disponibles sur votre appareil. Connexion dune antenne, dun rcepteur cble ou dun rcepteur satellite Pour connecter une antenne, un rcepteur cble ou un rcepteur satellite :
1. Connectez une extrmit de cble coaxial (non inclus) au port RF OUT sur lantenne, le cble ou le botier satellite. Si vous utilisez une antenne avec un cble deux conducteurs, vous pourriez avoir besoin dun adaptateur 300-75 Ohm (non fourni) pour la connecter larrire de votre tlviseur. De mme, si vous utilisez plusieurs antennes, vous pourriez avoir besoin dun combinateur (non fourni). 2. Connectez lautre extrmit du cble au port ANT / CABLE sur le ct du tlviseur. 3. En utilisant votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [INPUT] et slectionnez TV comme source dentre. PORT TV ANT/CABLE ou PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE Cable Set top box ANT OUT RF Out Connexion dun rcepteur satellite, dun lecteur DVD ou autre appareil Audio Visuel (AV) avec un cble vido composite (Jaune / Rouge / Blanc) Pour connecter un appareil AV avec un cble vido composite (non fourni) :
1. Utilisez les cbles audio et vidos pour connecter les ports composites vido / audio lappareil AV externe aux ports AV IN du tlviseur. (Vido = Jaune, Audio Gauche = Blanc, et Audio Droit = Rouge) 2. Branchez les appareils connects aux connecteurs AV sur le tlviseur avant de lallumer. 3. En utilisant votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [INPUT] et slectionnez AV comme source dentre. PORT TV R N I V A L O E D V I Rouge (R) Blanc (L) Cble Audio Rouge (R) Blanc (L) Jaune ou Vert (Vido) Jaune (Vido) Cble Vido PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE Magntoscope Lecteur / Enregistreur DVD Camra Vido Botier dcodeur Cble antenne satellite Rcepteur Satellite R L Video AV OUT 5 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connexion dun appareil AV avec un cble vido composante (Rouge /
Bleu / Vert) Pour connecter un priphrique AV avec un cble composante (non fourni) :
1. Utilisez un cble vido composante pour connecter les ports de sortie composantes du priphrique externe aux ports YPBPR du tlviseur. (Y = Vert, PB = Bleu et PR = Rouge). Utilisez un cble audio pour connecter les ports composites audio de lappareil externe aux prises TV AUDIO (L / R). 2. Branchez les appareils connects sur les ports YPBPR et L / R du tlviseur avant de lallumer. 3. En utilisant votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [INPUT] et slectionnez COMPOSANTE comme source dentre. PORT TV R NL I T N E N O P M O C R P B P Y Rouge (R) Blanc (L) Cble Audio Rouge (R) Blanc (L) Rouge (PR / CR) Rouge (PR / CR) Bleu (PB / CB) Cble composante Bleu (PB / CB) Vert (Y) Vert (Y) PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE Magntoscope Lecteur / Enregistreur DVD Camra Vido Botier dcodeur Cble antenne satellite R L PR PB Y Component Rcepteur Satellite REMARQUE Un appareil AV peut tre connect au tlviseur en utilisant une vido composante ou un cble vido composite. Connexion dun appareil AV avec un cble HDMI Ce tlviseur 4K dispose de deux versions diffrentes de logiciels pour les ports HDMI de manire pouvoir connecter des priphriques compatibles HDMI. Les deux entres HDMI haute puissance, version 2.0 (ports HDMI 3, HDMI 4) vous permettent de connecter des priphriques externes 4K Ultra-HD qui ncessitent plus de bande passante pour transmettre le signal lcran du tlviseur. Par exemple, un lecteur X-box ou Blu-ray qui prend en charge la norme 2.0. Les deux entres HDMI 1.4 sont parfaites pour tout priphrique externe compatible avec la rsolution haute dfinition de 1080p. Veuillez vous rfrer au Manuel dUtilisateur fourni avec votre appareil pour obtenir des instructions tape-par-tape. Pour connecter un appareil AV avec un cble HDMI (non fourni) :
1. Utilisez un cble HDMI pour connecter le port de sortie HDMI de lappareil AV au port HDMI du tlviseur. 2. Branchez les priphriques connects au port HDMI sur le tlviseur avant de les allumer. 3. En utilisant votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [INPUT] et slectionnez lentre HDMI correspondante. PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE PORT TV I M D H Cble HDMI I M D H DVD Botier dcodeur REMARQUES Puisque le connecteur HDMI fournit des signaux vido et audio, il nest pas ncessaire de connecter un cble audio. Nous vous recommandons dutiliser un cble HDMI avec 2 curs comme indiqu sur lillustration. 6 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connecter un priphrique compatible MHL Vous pouvez connecter un priphrique compatible MHL, comme un tlphone portable et afficher lcran de votre priphrique sur le tlviseur. 1. Connectez une extrmit dun cble HDMI--
PORT TV MHL au port micro-USB du priphrique. 2. Connectez lautre extrmit du cble au port I M D H L H M 3. Slectionnez la source correspondante sur le HDMI / MHL. tlviseur. PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE Cble HDMI--MHL Tlphone REMARQUES Cette fonction peut tre indisponible sur certains modles de tlviseur. Nous vous recommandons dutiliser un cble MHL avec 2 curs comme indiqu sur la figure. Connecter un casque Vous pouvez connecter un casque (non fourni) au port AUDIO OUT de votre tlviseur. Lorsque le casque est connect, le son des haut-parleurs intgrs sera dsactiv. PORT TV PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE
/
AUDIO OUT Casque audio Connecter des enceintes externes ou dautres rcepteurs audio Pour connecter les enceintes ou dautres rcepteurs audio avec un cble audio (non fourni) :
1. Utilisez un cble audio pour connecter lentre audio numrique du rcepteur audio au port DIGITAL AUDIO OUT du tlviseur. Une autre option consiste utiliser un cble RCA Y (1/8-stro mini phono L / R) pour connecter un systme audio analogique au port AUDIO OUT du tlviseur. 2. Branchez les appareils connects la prise lectrique principale avant de lallumer. PORT TV DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
/
AUDIO OUT Cble Audio Cble Audio Rouge (R) Blanc (L) PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE Barre Audio Numrique Amplificateur Audio Caisson de basse Haut-parleur CONSEIL : Si vous prfrez utiliser Canal de retour audio, reportez-vous la section Connexion dune barre de son numrique pour utiliser la Chaine de Retour Audio (ARC) la page 8. REMARQUES Lorsquun systme audio numrique est connect au port DIGITAL AUDIO OUT, diminuez le volume du tlviseur Laudio 5.1 CH (canaux) est disponible lorsque le tlviseur est connect un priphrique externe qui prend en et du systme audio. charge un son surround 5.1. Vous pouvez recevoir de laudio 5.1 de lune des deux faons suivantes. La premire consiste connecter le port DIGITAL AUDIO OUT du priphrique lamplificateur. La deuxime faon est de connecter le port DIGITAL AUDIO OUT larrire du tlviseur au port Optical de lamplificateur. Lorsque vous aurez termin lune des deux mthodes, assurez-vous daller dans les Paramtres audio avancs du tlviseur et slectionnez RAW pour recevoir laudio 5.1. Vous devrez galement vous rendre dans les paramtres audio de votre priphrique pour vous assurer quil est bien rgl en sortie 5.1. Cela peut tre affich en Bitsream , RAW ou Numrique . 7 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connexion dune barre de son numrique pour utiliser la Chaine de Retour Audio (ARC) Si vous souhaitez utiliser la fonction Chaine de Retour Audio (ARC) pour obtenir du son envoy depuis larrire de votre tlviseur par un cble HDMI vers une barre audio numrique, alors vous aurez besoin de connecter le cble au port HDMI / ARC. En utilisant cette fonction, vous pourrez galement commander la barre audio avec la tlcommande de votre tlviseur au lieu dutiliser plusieurs tlcommandes pour chaque appareil. Pour connecter une barre de son numrique avec un cble HDMI (non fourni) :
1. Branchez le cble qui est reli la barre de son au port HDMI / ARC sur le tlviseur. 2. Allumez la barre audio en appuyant sur la touche Power. 3. Appuyez sur la touche [
] de votre tlcommande et appuyez sur la touche [ > ] de votre tlcommande pour afficher le menu Rglages puis slectionnez Systme > Fonction HDMI. 4. Activer le paramtre Contrle CEC et MHL. 5. Pour revenir au menu Rglages, appuyer sur la touche [BACK] nouveau. 6. Slectionnez Audio > Paramtres audio avancs. 7. Allez la section de lcran qui affiche Priorit sortie audio (Haut-Parleurs ou ARC) et slectionnez ARC dabord. REMARQUES Seules les barres audio numriques qui requirent une connexion cble sont compatibles avec le tlviseur. Si le priphrique dispose dune fonction de slection dSource, assurez-vous de bien slectionner le mode TV. PORT TV PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE I M D H C R A Cble HDMI I M D H Barre Audio Numrique Connexion dun priphrique USB Vous pouvez connecter des priphriques USB tels que des disques durs, des cls USB et des appareils photo numriques pour parcourir vos photos, couter de la musique et regarder des films enregistrs. 1. Connectez un priphrique USB au port USB. 2. Slectionnez le type de Mdia sur lcran des PORT TV USB USB PRIPHRIQUE EXTERNE DC 5V 1A(MAX) DC 5V 0.5A(MAX) Mdias ou sur lcran daccueil. Pour plus dinformations, consultez la section Mdia la page 25. REMARQUES Lorsque vous connectez un disque dur ou un hub USB, branchez toujours au secteur lappareil connect. Le fait de dpasser la consommation lectrique totale de courant peut entraner des dommages. La consommation maximum des priphriques USB 1.1 et USB 2.0 est de 500 mA. La consommation maximum de courant des priphriques en USB 3.0 est de 1 A. Pour des disques durs mobiles de grande capacit et non standard, si ce courant dimpulsion est suprieur ou gal 1 A, il peut provoquer le redmarrage du tlviseur ou lauto-verrouillage. Par consquent, le tlviseur ne les prend pas en charge. Le port USB prend en charge une tension de 5V. 8 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connecter votre tlviseur un rseau Wi-Fi ou filaire Vous avez la possibilit de connecter votre tlviseur un rseau filaire ou Wi-Fi pour accder Internet. Pour plus dinformations sur les paramtres du rseau du tlviseur, veuillez vous reporter la section Menu Rseau la page 20. Connexion un rseau Wi-Fi Notre carte rseau Wi-Fi intgre est compatible avec les protocoles de communication IEEE 802.11 ac/b/g/n et nous vous recommandons dutiliser un routeur IEEE 802.11n ou IEEE 802.11ac. Lorsque vous lisez une vido sur une connexion IEEE 802.11 b/g, la vido pourrait tre saccade. Router Wi-Fi Le port mural Ethernet Carte rseau Wi-Fi intgr au tlviseur Cble LAN REMARQUES Vous devez utiliser la carte rseau Wi-Fi intgre pour connecter le tlviseur un rseau Wi-Fi. Le tlviseur ne prend pas en charge les adaptateurs rseau externes en USB. Pour utiliser un rseau wi-fi, votre tlviseur doit tre connect un routeur IP Wi-Fi. Si le routeur IP Wi-Fi est compatible avec le protocole Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), votre tlviseur peut utiliser une adresse DHCP ou une adresse IP statique pour se connecter au rseau Wi-Fi. Slectionnez un canal pour le routeur IP Wi-Fi qui ne soit pas utilis. Si le canal affect au routeur IP Wi-Fi est actuellement utilis par un autre priphrique proche, cela se traduira par des interfrences et lchec de la communication. Si vous utilisez un systme de scurit autres que les systmes numrs ci-dessous, il ne pourra pas fonctionner avec le tlviseur. Si le mode 802.11n Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) est slectionn et que le type de cryptage est rgl sur WEP, TKIP ou TKIP-AES (WPS2 mixte) pour votre point daccs (AP), la connexion du tlviseur SHARP ne respectera pas les spcifications de certification Wi-Fi. Si votre point daccs (AP) prend en charge le protocole Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), vous pourrez vous connecter au rseau grce au Push Button Configuration (PBC) ou un code PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS configure automatiquement le SSID et la cl WPA dans chaque mode. 9 9 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Connexion un rseau filaire (Ethernet) Vous pouvez connecter votre tlviseur votre rseau local de lune des trois manires suivantes :
Option 1 Vous pouvez connecter votre tlviseur votre rseau en connectant le port LAN larrire de votre tlviseur un modem externe laide dun cble Ethernet Cat 5. Voir lillustration ci-dessous. PORT TV Modem externe
(ADSL / VDSL / TV par cble) Le Port Modem sur le mur LAN Cble Ethernet Cble modem Option 2 Vous pouvez connecter votre tlviseur votre rseau en connectant le port LAN au dos de votre tlviseur un routeur IP reli un modem externe. Utilisez un cble Ethernet pour la connexion. Voir lillustration ci-dessous. PORT TV LAN IP Sharer (routeur)
(avec serveur DHCP) Modem externe
(ADSL / VDSL / TV par cble) Le Port Modem sur le mur Cble Ethernet Cble Ethernet Cble modem Option 3 Selon la configuration de votre rseau, vous pourrez peut-tre connecter votre tlviseur votre rseau local en connectant le port LAN au dos de votre tlviseur directement avec un cble Ethernet une prise murale de rseau. Voir lillustration ci-dessous. Le Port Ethernet sur le mur PORT TV LAN Cble Ethernet Si vous possdez un rseau dynamique, vous devez utiliser un modem ADSL ou un routeur qui prend en charge le protocole Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Les modems et les routeurs fournissent automatiquement ladresse IP, le masque de sous-rseau, la passerelle et DNS. Grce cette fonctionnalit, vous ne devez pas les saisir manuellement. La plupart des rseaux domestiques sont des rseaux dynamiques. Certains rseaux ncessitent une adresse IP statique. Si votre rseau ncessite une adresse IP statique, vous devez saisir ladresse IP, le masque de sous-rseau, la passerelle et les valeurs DNS manuellement sur lcran dinstallation de votre cble-oprateur pour votre tlviseur lorsque vous configurez la connexion rseau. Pour obtenir les valeurs dadresse IP, de masque de sous-rseau, de la passerelle et du DNS, contactez votre fournisseur daccs Internet (FAI). REMARQUE Vous pouvez utiliser des modems ADSL qui prennent en charge le protocole DHCP si votre rseau ncessite une adresse IP statique. Les modems ADSL prenant en charge le protocole DHCP vous permettent galement dutiliser des adresses IP statiques. 10 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Utiliser votre tlcommande Touches de votre tlcommande metteur infrarouge Marche / Arrt INPUT Modifier la source dentre TV Entrer des chanes /
Entrer des chiffres Allumer ou teindre les sous-titres CC La touche de raccourci pour le menu de configuration rapide. D-pad (touches de navigation haut / bas / gauche / droite) OK Retourner lendroit prcdent dans le menu ou dans une application BACK EXIT Touche Dash Slectionnez une sous-chane numrique Touches de fonctions spciales Toutes les applications Touche de confirmation Afficher lcran daccueil Quitter lapplication Live TV (Tlvision en direct) Volume (haut / bas) VOL CH Chane (suivante / prcdente) Mode muet et rtablir le son Touches de contrle du contenu des mdias numriques SLEEP Rgler la dure avant la mise en veille Touches daccs rapide vers les applications Informations sur la Gamme de Tlcommandes La tlcommande peut fonctionner jusqu une distance de 26 pieds en face du tlviseur. Elle peut fonctionner un angle horizontal ou vertical de 30 degrs. 11 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Commencez utiliser votre tlcommande 1. Faites glisser le couvercle arrire pour ouvrir le compartiment des piles de la tlcommande. 1 2 3 Poussez et faites glisser doucement Insrez les piles Poussez et faites glisser doucement 2. Insrez deux piles de taille AAA. Assurez-vous de faire correspondre les extrmits (+) et (-) des piles avec les extrmits (+) et (-) indiques dans le compartiment des piles. 3. Replacez le couvercle du compartiment des piles. REMARQUES Jetez les piles dans un endroit dsign. Ne les jetez pas au feu. Enlevez les piles usages immdiatement pour empcher toute fuite dans le compartiment de la batterie. Si vous ne comptez pas utiliser la tlcommande pendant une longue priode, retirez les piles. Les produits chimiques contenus dans les piles peuvent provoquer une ruption cutane. Si les piles fuient, nettoyez le compartiment de la batterie avec un chiffon. Si des produits chimiques touchent votre peau, rincez alors immdiatement. Ne mlangez pas les anciennes piles avec les neuves. Ne mlangez pas les piles alcalines, avec les piles standards (carbon-zinc) ou rechargeables (NiCd, NiMH, etc.). Ne continuez pas utiliser la tlcommande si elle devient tide ou chaude. Appelez immdiatement notre Centre de Support sur le site de support SHARP. Programmez votre Tlcommande Cble Universel ou Satellite pour utiliser votre Nouveau Tlviseur SHARP. (uniquement pour les TATS-UNIS) Si vous souhaitez programmer les autres tlcommandes de votre foyer votre nouveau tlviseur SHARP, veuillez vous rfrer au manuel dutilisation fourni par votre fournisseur de Cble ou de Satellite. Les Manuels dutilisateur des fournisseurs de Cble ou Satellite doivent inclure des instructions sur la faon de programmer leur tlcommande pour votre tlviseur. Une liste de codes SHARP pour les fournisseurs de cble et de satellite les plus courants sont numrs ci-dessous. Utilisez le code SHARP associ votre fournisseur de Cble ou Satellite (si applicable). DIRECTV 0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable 386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 Comcast 0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications 0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network 505, 627, 538, 720, 659 Si le code SHARP associ votre fournisseur de cble ou de satellite ne figure pas dans la liste, ne fonctionne pas ou si vous ne pouvez pas localiser les instructions pour programmer votre tlcommande, appelez votre centre de service la clientle du fournisseur local de Cble ou Satellite. Si votre fournisseur de Cble ou Satellite ne possde pas de code SHARP disponible, veuillez nous contacter. Utilisation de votre Rcepteur cble ou Rcepteur Satellite en tant que Tlcommande Universelle Si vous prfrez utiliser votre Rcepteur cble ou Rcepteur Satellite en tant que Tlcommande Universelle , consultez alors la page de Support pour voir la liste des codes. 12 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Effectuer la configuration initiale Appuyez sur le bouton [
Aprs lapparition de lcran de dmarrage avec le logo SHARP, le menu de configuration rapide apparat. cran
] de la tlcommande pour allumer le tlviseur. Tche LANGUE ET EMPLACEMENT Langue Franais Pays Canada Fuseau horaire Est Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer CONDITIONS GENERALES D'UTILISATION Accepter Tout Le CLUF et Condions doivent tre accepts pour connuer. Accepter le CLUF Acceptez Condions ... Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer MODE D'UTILISATION DU TELEVISEUR Mode du tlviseur Economie d'nergie Economie d'nergie En Mode Economie d'nergie, votre tlviseur ajuste automaquement la luminosit de votre cran en foncon de la lumire ambiante de la pice. Ce mode ulise moins d'nergie. Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer 13 1. En utilisant les flches directionnelles de votre tlcommande, choisissez votre Langue, Pays et Fuseau horaire. 2. Naviguez laide de la flche avant et appuyez sur la touche
[OK]. Astuce : Le bord des listes droulantes et les flches avant et arrire deviennent de couleur bleu lorsque vous les slectionnez. 1. Appuyez sur [OK] pour slectionner Accepter Tout. 2. Lorsque vous avez termin, naviguez vers la flche Avant et appuyez sur [OK]. Slectionnez Economie dnergie
(qui apparat par dfaut). Ensuite, naviguez vers la flche Avant et appuyez sur [OK]. REMARQUE Le Mode magasin ne doit tre slectionn que par les dtaillants qui veulent faire une dmonstration du tlviseur. FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL cran CONNEXION RSEAU Ethernet WiFi Sleconnez un Rseau A2F4-05 A3F6-01 A6F5-19 A1F2-02 A2F4-03 A2F5-01 R22 Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer SOURCE DENTREE LIVE TV TV AV COMPOSANTE HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer FLICITATIONS!
Votre tlviseur est maintenant prt uliser Franais Canada Est Mode Economie d'nergie WiFi TV OK Langue Condions Mode Rseau Source Terminer 14 Tche Si votre tlviseur ne dtecte pas automatiquement une connexion Ethernet, slectionnez WiFi. Lorsque vous avez termin, slectionnez votre rseau dans la liste qui saffiche et passez lcran suivant. Slectionnez la faon dont vous recevez vos chanes de tlvision. Choisissez lune des sources cidessous et passez lcran suivant. TV AV COMPOSANTE HDMI REMARQUE Si vous utilisez une antenne pour recevoir les chanes, vous devez effectuer la configuration initiale de manire lancer un balayage des chanes. Appuyez sur la touche [OK] de votre tlcommande si vous tes certain des slections qui apparaissent lcran. Dans le cas contraire, accdez la flche de retour sur lcran pour modifier votre slection. FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Instructions des raccourcis Vous pouvez utiliser les raccourcis de la tlcommande pour un accs rapide. Allumer ou teindre votre tlviseur Pour allumer votre tlviseur :
1. Branchez le cordon dalimentation larrire du tlviseur, puis branchez le cordon dalimentation une prise secteur. 2. Lorsque le tlviseur est allum, appuyez sur le bouton [
Pour teindre votre tlviseur, appuyez sur le bouton [
] de la tlcommande.
] de la tlcommande pour allumer le tlviseur. REMARQUES Si votre tlviseur est en mode veille, il consomme toujours de llectricit. Pour dconnecter compltement lalimentation, veuillez retirer la fiche de la prise de courant. Si votre tlviseur ne reoit pas de signal dune source exterieure pendant plusieurs minutes, il passera automatiquement en mode veille. Slection de la source Slectionnez la source en fonction du priphrique vido que vous avez connect votre tlviseur. Pour slectionner la source :
1. Allumez votre tlviseur, puis appuyez sur la touche [INPUT] de la tlcommande, la liste des sources apparat. 2. Appuyez sur les touches [< / >] pour slectionner la source. 3. Appuyez sur la touche [OK] pour confirmer votre slection. Utilisation de la Live TV Pour visionner des programmes en radiodiffusion, slectionnez licne [Live TV] sur la tlcommande. Guide de recherche des chanes Lorsque vous slectionnez TV comme une source dentre, si aucune chane de tlvision na pas pralablement t enregistre, une recherche de chanes vous sera demande. Avant de pouvoir dmarrer une recherche de chane, vous devez dfinir un mode de syntonisation, par Antenne ou Cble. Vous pouvez galement vous rendre dans le menu de Rglages > Chane pour modifier les paramtres de chane. Lancer Live TV Aprs avoir effectu la recherche de chanes pour la premire fois, lcran affichera des conseils dutilisation pour la Live TV (Tlvision en direct), y compris : comment dmarrer la liste de chanes ou comment accder aux informations des chanes, entre autres. OK Voir les informations de la chane BACK PRE-CH
[OK] Afficher la liste des chanes
[ v ] Voir les informations de la chane
[BACK] Voir les chanes rcentes OK Afficher la liste des chanes 15 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Affichage des informations des chanes Au fur et mesure que vous utilisez la touche [CH+ / CH-] sur la tlcommande pour naviguer travers les chanes, une bannire dinformation apparat en haut de lcran. 1 2 3 4 5 5-2 AT05-2 Jeudi 12h 09 30 Juin 6 7 Antenne AT05 480i 22h 00 01h 00 01h 00 - 04h 00 AT05 480i 1/1 Inconnu 5.1CH 4:3 480i CC 8 9 10 Cette bannire affiche les informations suivantes :
1. Nombre de Chane 2. tat de verrouillage 3. Source 4. Nom du Programme 5. Identification du programme 6. Nom de la chane 7. Date et heure 8. Dtail du programme 9. Dbut et fin du prochain programme 10. Dmarrer / Arrter barre de dure du programme actuel Si vous regardez une chane en particulier, vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la flche vers le haut de votre tlcommande pour afficher les informations de la chane. Affichage dune liste de chanes Aprs avoir effectu une recherche automatique des chanes (si vous utilisez une antenne) ou si vous recevez vos chanes travers un fournisseur de cble, vous pouvez afficher votre liste des chanes en appuyant sur la touche [OK]
de votre tlcommande. La liste des chanes saffichera sur le ct droit de lcran. Cration dune liste Favoris Pour accder rapidement vos chanes prfres, vous pouvez crer une liste de Favoris. Pour crer votre liste Favoris :
1. Appuyez sur la touche [
2. Appuyez sur la touche [ > ] pour afficher le menu Rglages. 3. Slectionnez Chane > Liste des favoris. 4. laide des touches [ v / v ] de votre tlcommande, slectionnez une chane et appuyez sur la touche [OK]. Une icne en forme de cur apparatra ct de la chane pour confirmer quelle a t ajoute avec succs.
] de votre tlcommande. Voir votre liste Favoris Pour regarder les chanes que vous avez ajoutes votre Liste des favoris, appuyez simplement sur [OK] sur votre tlcommande pour afficher la Liste des chanes. La Liste des chanes apparat sur le ct droit de lcran et des icnes en forme de cur apparaissent ct de vos Liste des favoris. Appuyez sur les touches [< / >] pour slectionner la liste des chanes (Antenne ou Cble, et la liste des Favoris. 16 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Rglages de base Votre tlviseur SHARP est livr avec de nombreuses options de rglage pour vous permettre de personnaliser limage en fonction de vos prfrences de visualisation et de lenvironnement. Au fur et mesure que vous naviguez travers les diffrents crans pour accder aux rglages, certains des indicateurs apparaissent comme Activer ou signifie quune Dsactiver et certains prsentent des symboles ouvert fonctionnalit est dsactive. Un indicateur et ferm
] pour accder le menu Raccourci Menu, puis appuyez sur la touche [ > ] du Utilisation du menu Rglages Vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche [
D-pad pour afficher le menu Rglages. Le menu Rglages comprend les paramtres suivants :
Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Dans chaque menu, vous pouvez :
Appuyer sur les touches [ v / v ] pour slectionner un lment. Appuyer sur la touche [OK] pour entrer dans le sous-menu. Appuyer sur les touches [ < / > ] pour rgler la valeur. Appuyer sur la touche [BACK] pour revenir au menu prcdent. Appuyer sur la touche [EXIT] pour quitter le menu. Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Mode Image Standard Luminosit 50 Contraste 50 Teinte 50 Format de limage Automatique Rtroclairage Rglages avancs de lImage Restaurer Dfauts 17 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Mode Image Standard Luminosit 50 Contraste 50 Teinte 50 Format de limage Automatique Rtroclairage Menu Image Mode Image : Si vous souhaitez configurer les paramtres dimage, vous disposez de six modes diffrents : Dynamique, Standard, Cinma, conomie dnergie, Jeux et Sport. Restaurer Dfauts Rglages avancs de lImage Une fois que vous choisissez le mode, vous pouvez rgler limage sur la base des paramtres suivants :
Luminosit : Rgler le niveau de Luminosit pour produire des images plus claires ou plus fonces. Contraste : Rgler le niveau de Contraste pour augmenter ou diminuer la luminosit des images. Teinte : Rgle lintensit des couleurs de limage pour une image plus dynamique. Format de limage : Rgle le Format de limage pour largir ou pour zoomer sur limage. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les paramtres suivants : Normal, Zoom, Grand cran, Cinma, RATIO PIXEL 1: 1, Panoramique, Direct ou Automatique. Rtroclairage : Certains modles sont dots dun Commande du rtroclairage dynamique que vous pouvez Dsactiver ou rgler en intensit Elev ou Faible. Certains modles disposent dun rglage de Gradateur local qui permet au tlviseur dajuster automatiquement le rtro-clairage par sections en fonction des changements dans limage et daugmenter le contraste. Le rglage du Rtroclairage vous permet de rgler la luminosit des images lcran. Dautre part, un Capteur ECO est disponible pour permettre au tlviseur dajuster automatiquement les rglages de limage en fonction de la luminosit ambiante dans la pice de visionnage. Le rglage Rtroclairage minimum vous permet de rgler la luminosit des images lcran. Cette fonctionnalit vous permet de raliser des conomies car elle rduit la consommation lectrique. Rglages avancs de lImage : Rglages avancs de limage en fonction de vos prfrences de visualisation. Affichage : Rgle les paramtres avancs de limage dans la source en composantes. Overscan : Modifier les paramtres de format vido lgrement pour recadrer les bords de limage affiche. Teinte : Rgle les couleurs du vert au magenta pour afficher des tons plus naturels de la peau de personnes sur lcran. Nettet : Rgler la nettet des contours des images qui apparaissent. Compensation de Mouvement : Cette fonction permet de rduire la rmanence sur lcran lorsque des objets limage se dplacent rapidement. Vous pouvez la rgler sur diffrents niveaux : Dsactiver, Effac, Standard, leve. Un rglage lev produira une image plus lisse, alors quun rglage Faible se traduira par une image comportant plus de saccades (secousses). REMARQUE Certains modles ne prennent pas en charge cette fonction. Rduction du bruit numrique : Amliore la clart de limage qui apparat en rduisant le bruit. Contraste adaptatif : Contraste automatique des zones sombres et clairage des zones claires des images pour obtenir un meilleur affichage des dtails. Temprature Couleur : Slectionne une temprature de couleur prdfinie. Balance des blancs : Rgler lintensit des lumires rouges, vertes et bleues pour afficher les vritables couleurs de tous les points de limage. Tuner couleur : Rgle la Teinte, la Saturation et la Luminosit des paramtres de couleur. Restaurer Dfauts : Restaurer tous les paramtres configurs dans le mode Image actuel aux valeurs par dfaut. 18 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Menu Audio Mode Audio : Slectionnez un mode audio prrgl en fonction du type de contenu que vous coutez : Standard, Cinma, Musique, Voix et Nuit. Une fois que vous choisissez le mode, vous pouvez rgler laudio sur la base des paramtres suivants :
Amliorations audio : Total Technology offre la meilleure exprience audio possible du tlviseur. Total Sonics : Optimise la qualit audio globale en Mode Audio Standard Amliorations audio Paramtres audio avancs Restaurer Dfauts Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV augmentant les basses, en faisant ressortir les dialogues de manire claire et naturelle, et en largissant le champ sonore. Total Surround : Offre une exprience de son surround avec un traitement psycho-acoustique pour placer les sons sur le ct, derrire et au-dessus du spectateur. Pour de meilleurs rsultats, utilisez le mode Total Sonics. Total Volume : Maintient les niveaux dintensit sonore des programmes cohrents dans une large de gamme dynamique, des publicits trop fortes, et des changements de chane ou de source. Paramtres audio avancs : Rgler les paramtres et la qualit audio du tlviseur. galiseur : Rglage de lequaliseur diffrentes frquences. Synchronisation du doublage : Synchroniser limage affiche avec la sortie audio. Balance : Rgler la balance gauche et droite pour optimiser le son en fonction dun emplacement spcifique. Sortie audio numrique : Slectionne le format de sortie audio numrique qui convient le mieux au type de priphrique audio. Par exemple, choisissez RAW (qui est de laudio non compress au format RAW) si vous disposez dun systme de son surround 5.1. Choisissez PCM si vous avez un amplificateur qui nest pas compatible avec la technologie Dolby Digital. Dlai audio numrique : Rgler le dlai de temporisation de sortie pour synchroniser le son dun haut-parleur externe avec le tlviseur. Priorit sortie audio (Haut-Parleurs ou ARC) : Slectionner les haut-parleurs du tlviseur ou un haut-parleur externe pour la sortie audio. Sortie audio : Modifier la faon dont laudio est envoy au priphrique connect au port de sortie audio du tlviseur. Restaurer Dfauts : Restaurer tous les paramtres du mode audio aux valeurs par dfaut. Menu Chanes Mode Tuner : Slectionnez la faon dont vous recevez les chanes de tlvision en tant quentre pendant un balayage des chanes. Ce balayage peut tre effectu par les airs (antenne) ou par lintermdiaire dun dcodeur. Recherche automatique de chanes : Rechercher des chanes automatiquement partir de votre tuner TV. Ignorer la chane : Ignorer une chane que votre tlviseur a slectionn lors dune recherche de chane antrieure. Liste des favoris : Accder rapidement vos chanes prfres en crant une Liste des favoris. Mode Tuner Antenne Recherche automatique de chanes Ignorer la chane Liste des favoris Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV 19 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Menu Rseau Configuration rseau : Configurer votre accs rseau pour obtenir un accs complet aux fonctionnalits Smart TV. Lorsque la connexion est de type Ethernet, vous devez choisir une connexion rseau filaire pour accder Internet. Ethernet : Afficher ltat de connexion de rseau. Mode de configuration IP : Configurer les Paramtres IP de votre connexion rseau. Configuration rseau Information rseau Dconnecter Anyview Stream Activer Nom du tlviseur Smart TV Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Lorsque le type de connexion est Wi-Fi, vous devez choisir une connexion de rseau sans fil pour accder Internet. Paramtres avancs : Configurer les paramtres avancs Wi-Fi pour votre tlviseur. Rseaux disponibles : Slectionner un rseau disponible pour se connecter. Vous pouvez galement ajouter ou rafrachir des rseaux Wi-Fi. Lorsque le type de connexion est Dsactiver, vous avez dsactiv la connexion Internet. Information rseau : Afficher les informations concernant votre connexion rseau. Anyview Stream : Partager des vidos, de la musique ou tout autre contenu depuis un autre appareil sur votre tlviseur. Nom du tlviseur : Choisisser un nom pour votre tlviseur. Le nom sera affich sur les dispositifs disponibles pour le partage de donnes. Menu Systme Pays : Merci de choisir lemplacement ou se situe votre tlviseur. Heure : Rgler lheure actuelle en fonction de votre emplacement. Fuseau horaire : Slectionner votre fuseau horaire. Format Horaire : Rgler lheure afficher avec un format 12 ou 24 heures. Heure dt : Slectionner si vous voulez appliquer lHeure dt sur votre tlviseur. Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Pays Canada Heure Langue Contrle parental Paramtres Applications Sous-titrage Fonction HDMI Paramtres avancs Date / Heure : Configuration de la Date et lHeure. Allumage Programmable : Activez lallumage programmable, Dsactiver, Une fois ou Tous les jours. Mise en veille Programmable : Rgle le dlai de mise en veille sur Dsactiver, Une fois, Tous les jours. Dure avant la mise en veille : Rglez la dure avant la mise en veille pour teindre automatiquement le tlviseur dans un dlai dtermin : Dsactiver, 10 Mins, 20 Mins, 30 Mins, 40 Mins, 50 Mins, 60 Mins, 90 Mins et 120 Mins. Langue : Rgle la Langue du Menu et les Langue audio prfre sur le tlviseur. Contrle parental : Activer le Contrle parental pour bloquer laccs des enfants certains programmes. Le mot de passe par dfaut est 0000. Pour plus dinformations sur le Contrle parental, reportez-vous la section Contrle parental la page 22. Paramtres Applications : Configurer les paramtres des applications de votre tlviseur. Netflix : Retirer ce tlviseur de votre compte Netflix. Merci de contacter Netflix si vous souhaitez mettre fin votre abonnement. ESN: Afficher le numro de srie lectronique Netflix. VUDU: Retirer ce tlviseur de votre compte VUDU. Veuiller contacter VUDU si vous souhaitez mettre fin votre abonnement. 20 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Sous-titrage : Ajuster les paramtres de sous-titrage. Sous-titrage analogique : Slectionnez lun des rglages de sous-titrage analogique parmi les options suivantes :
Dsactiver, CC1-CC4, TEXTE1 - TEXTE4. CC1 - CC4: le sous-titrage apparat dans une petite bannire en bas de lcran. CC1 est habituellement la version imprime de laudio. CC2 - CC4 le contenu est fourni par le diffuseur. TEXTE1 - TEXTE4 : Des sous-titrages qui couvrent la moiti ou la totalit de lcran. Le contenu des sous-titres TEXTE1 - TEXTE4 est fourni par le diffuseur. Dsactiver : Pour dsactiver le sous-titrage analogique. Sous-titrage numrique : Slectionner un rglage pour le sous-titrage numrique parmi les options suivantes :
Dsactiver, CS1-CS6. Rglage CC numriques : Deux styles de sous-titrages sont disponibles. Lun est la fonction Automatique dfinie par le diffuseur, tandis que lautre est un style Personnalis lequel vous pouvez rgler la Taille, la Police, la Couleur du texte ainsi que Transparence du texte et la Couleur de larrire-plan, entre autres. Fonction HDMI : Configurer le contrle des priphriques autoriss CEC avec la tlcommande de votre tlviseur. Contrle CEC et MHL : Autoriser les priphriques HDMI pour un contrle rciproque. Extinction automatique des priphriques : Activer lextinction des priphriques HDMI autoriss CEC par le tlviseur. Mise En Marche Automatique du Tlviseur : Activer la mise en marche du tlviseur par les priphriques autoriss CEC. Priphriques connects : Autoriser les priphriques CEC habilits communiquer les uns avec les autres lorsquils sont connects via un cble HDMI. Listes des priphriques autoriss CEC : Afficher la liste de tous les priphriques autoriss CEC. REMARQUES Des cbles HDMI doivent tre utiliss pour connecter des priphriques compatibles HDMI CEC votre tlviseur. La fonction HDMI CEC doit tre allume. Si vous connectez un priphrique HDMI qui nest pas compatible HDMI CEC, les fonctions de commande HDMI CEC ne fonctionneront pas. Selon le priphrique HDMI connect, la fonction HDMI-CEC de contrle ne peut pas fonctionner. Paramtres avancs : Accder au menu des Paramtres avancs. Temps douverture du menu dpass : Dfinir le temps daffichage du menu dsir : 10s, 20s, 30s, 60s ou Dsactiver. Mode dutilisation : Configure votre tlviseur pour une utilisation Economie dnergie ou Mode magasin
(certains modles offrent une option de Mode magasin avec une rsolution 4K). Nom Priphriques : Modifier les noms des priphriques dentre. Source LiveTV par dfaut : Choisir lentre par dfaut slectionne en appuyant sur la touche Live TV sur la tlcommande. Assistant de configuration : Utiliser lAssistant de configuration pour vous aider rgler votre tlviseur. Tmoin dalimentation : Slectionner si le Tmoin dalimentation reste allum ou pas lorsque vous regardez la tlvision. propos du menu TV Information Systme : Afficher les informations systme. Mentions lgales : Lire les mentions lgales. Mise jour automatique du Firmware : Rgle votre tlviseur pour mettre jour automatiquement le Firmware. Vrifier les mises jour du Firmware : Assurez-vous que votre tlviseur possde le dernier Firmware. Restaurer les paramtres par dfaut : Restaurer les paramtre dusines de votre tlviseur. 21 Rglages Image Audio Chane Rseau Systme A propos de la TV Information Systme Mentions lgales Mise jour automatique du Firmware Activer Vrifier les mises jour du Firmware Restaurer les paramtres par dfaut. FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Contrle parental Les rglages du Contrle parental vous permettent de bloquer le contenu que les enfants ne doivent pas regarder. Pour ce faire, vous devez dfinir un mot de passe quatre chiffres. Le mot de passe par dfaut est 0000. Activer le contrle parental 1. Appuyez sur la touche [
2. Appuyez sur la touche [ > ] pour afficher le menu Rglages. 3. Slectionnez Systme > Contrle parental. 4. Appuyez sur la touche [OK] sur votre tlcommande, une fentre pour Entrer le code PIN apparat. laide du
] de votre tlcommande. clavier numrique de votre tlcommande, saisissez le mot de passe par dfaut 0000 puis appuyez sur [OK]. 5. Aller aux Verrouillage. 6. Appuyez sur la touche [OK] de votre tlcommande. Vous verrez les autres paramtres de Contrle parental passer dun tat gris la surbrillance. Lorsque cela se produit, commencez ajouter dautres paramtres au Blocage Horaire, de Blocage de chanes, de Blocage de programme, de Blocage par Source, Modifier le code PIN ou Restaurer les paramtres de contrle parental par dfaut. Blocage Horaire : Bloquer certaines chanes et programmes selon des horaires prdtermins. Blocage de chanes : Bloquer les programmes par chane lorsque vous activez la fonction de Contrle parental. Blocage de programme : Pour bloquer les programmes selon leur catgorie de classement lorsque vous avez activ la fonctionnalit de Contrle parental et que vous avez choisi le blocage de cette catgorie. Blocage par Source : Bloquer le contenu en provenance de priphriques connects certains ports du tlviseur. Modifier le code PIN : Modifier le code PIN que vous utilisez pour accder au contrle parental. Si vous voulez modifier votre code PIN de contrle parental, vous devez saisir dabord le nouveau code PIN puis le saisir nouveau. REMARQUE Si vous avez oubli votre mot de passe, appelez le Service aprs-vente SHARP. Restaurer les paramtres de contrle parental par dfaut : Revenir aux paramtres de contrle parental au rglage par dfaut. Description pour le classement des catgories amricaines Contenu A D L S V FV Dfini comme Tous Dialogues suggestifs Langage vulgaire ou grossier Situations sexuelles Violence Violence imaginaire Description des classifications en fonction de lge ge TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA Dfini comme Enfants de tout ge Destin aux enfants plus gs Audience gnrale Surveillance parentale suggre Public de plus de 14 ans Public adulte uniquement 22 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL U.S. Classement des films Classification Dfini comme Audience gnrale G Surveillance parentale suggre PG Public de plus de 14 ans PG-13 Restreint R Autoris aux personnes de plus de 17 ans NC-17 Cette classification a t remplace par NC-17 X Classifications pour langlais canadien Classification Dfini comme C C8+
G PG 14+
18+
Enfants Enfants de 8 ans et plus Programmation gnrale adapte tout type de public Surveilance parentale Public de 14 ans ou plus Programmation pour adultes Classifications pour le franais du Canada Classification Dfini comme G Gnral (appropri pour tous les ges et peut contenir peu ou pas de violence ou du contenu caractre sexuel) Tout public mais dconseill aux jeunes enfants (peut contenir des scnes susceptibles de perturber les enfants de moins de huit ans). Le visionnage avec un parent est recommand. La programmation est approprie pour les enfants de 13 ans et plus et elle peut contenir de la violence modre, du language vulgaire et certaines situations sexuelles. Recommand pour les enfants 16 ans et plus mais les programmes peuvent contenir des scnes de violence intense, du langage vulgaire et du contenu sexuel. Programamtions destines aux tlspectateurs de 18 ans et plus. La programmation peut contenir de la violence extrme, des scnes sexuelles explicites et/ou de la pornographie. 8ans+
13ans+
16ans+
18ans+
REMARQUE Toutes les classifications de programme qui dpassent vos rglages seront galement bloques. Par exemple, si vous choisissez de bloquer la classification PG-13, les classifications plus leves (R et NC-17) seront automatiquement bloques galement. 23 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Rglages avancs du tlviseur Se familiariser avec lcran daccueil La conception simple du menu de lcran daccueil facilite la navigation. Il est le centre daccs pour accder aux Top de Apps, Recommandation, lHistorique, aux Mdia ou aux Application et aux Intrants de votre tlviseur. Pour accder lcran daccueil, appuyez sur la touche [
votre d-pad pour faire votre choix.
] de votre tlcommande et utilisez les touches flches de Indicateurs et icnes en haut de lcran daccueil Vous pouvez toujours voir lheure actuelle dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran daccueil. Si votre tlviseur est connect Internet via une connexion Wi-Fi, une icne apparatra dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran. Cette position vous permet de savoir, tout moment, si vous tes connect Internet travers votre tlviseur. Si votre tlviseur est connect Internet, les conditions mtorologiques actuelles apparatront dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran. Dautre part, si vous avez connect un priphrique (telle quune cl USB) un port USB de votre tlviseur et quil le reconnat, licne du priphrique saffichera galement dans cette zone. Voici le nom des sections qui apparaissent sur lcran daccueil Lcran daccueil affiche les noms des sections suivantes :
Top de Apps Recommandation Historique Intrants Mdia Application Intrants Chaque fois que vous accdez lcran daccueil, les icnes de vos entres seront affiches lcran. Les priphriques que vous aurez connects chaque entre seront mis en vidence. Les entres qui nont pas de priphrique connect seront grises. 24 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Mdia Mdia est le lieu o vous pouvez tlcharger, visionner et couter diffrents types de contenus (par exemple, vos photos, votre musique et vos films) en utilisant lune des mthodes suivantes :
Une cl USB ou un disque dur Compatible avec votre tlphone mobile, tablette ou autre appareil personnel : vous pouvez voir des films, des images et des photos stocks sur votre appareil personnel et les afficher et les lire sur votre tlviseur. Lorsque vous connectez votre cl USB ou un autre priphrique votre Tlviseur, celui-ci dtecte automatiquement le priphrique et affiche une icne du priphrique dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran. Onglets qui apparaissent sur lcran Mdia Lcran Mdia affiche quatre onglets : Image, Vido, Musique et Tous. Formats de fichiers qui peuvent tre pris en charge REMARQUE En raison de diffrences dans les outils de programmation et dautres facteurs, certains formats de fichiers rpertoris ici peuvent ne pas tre pris en charge. Moyen Vido Image Musique Format de fichier
.avi (MPEG2, Divx), .mkv (Divx), .mpeg (MPEG2), .wmv (Divx, XviD)
.JPG
.mp3 Parcourir du contenu Pour parcourir le contenu en fonction du type de contenu auquel vous souhaitez accder :
1. Allez jusqu longlet du menu appropri sur le ct gauche de lcran et slectionnez Musique, Vido, Image ou Tous. La bibliothque des lments saffiche sur le ct droit de lcran. 2. Allez la droite de lcran et cliquez sur le nom du dossier qui contient les fichiers souhaits. 3. Faites votre slection pour lire ou voir le contenu. Si vous voulez fermer le centre des mdias, appuyez sur la touche [EXIT] de votre tlcommande. Afficher des photos comme un diaporama Pour afficher les photos dans un diaporama :
1. Accdez jusqu longlet Image. 2. Cliquez sur Dmarrer le diaporama. Le diaporama de vos photos dmarre. Pour arrter le diaporama, appuyez sur la touche [OK] de votre tlcommande et appuyez nouveau sur [OK] pour redmarrer. Visionner des vidos Lorsque vous regardez des vidos, un certain nombre dicnes apparaissent en bas de lcran. Vous pouvez utiliser les touches de navigation de votre tlcommande pour slectionner ces icnes qui vous permettront de contrler la vido. 25 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Applications De nombreuses applications installes par dfaut sont disponibles. Installer une application Bien que le tlviseur propose de nombreuses applications par dfaut, vous pouvez souhaiter installer dautres applications. Pour installer une application :
1. partir de lcran daccueil, cliquez sur licne Opera TV Store. 2. Accdez longlet Rechercher en haut de lcran. 3. Commencez saisir le nom de lapplication. Au fur et mesure que vous tapez, lOpera Store vous suggre des mots pour acclrer votre recherche. 4. Utilisez les touches de navigation de votre tlcommande pour slectionner lapplication. Une page proposant une description de lapplication saffiche. 5. Cliquez sur Ouvrir ou sur AJOUTER AUX FAVORIS. Dsinstaller une application Vous pouvez supprimer uniquement les applications que vous avez installes sur votre tlviseur. Les applications installes par dfaut ne peuvent pas tre supprimes. Pour supprimer une application :
1. partir de lcran Applications, cliquez sur licne Editer. 2. Utilisez les flches directionnelles de votre tlcommande pour slectionner lapplication que vous souhaitez supprimer. REMARQUE Lapplication qui dispose dune icne dans le coin suprieur droit peut tre supprime. 3. Appuyez sur la touche [OK] de votre tlcommande. Un message saffiche vous demandant si vous tes sr de bien vouloir supprimer lapplication. 4. Cliquez sur OK. Un message de confirmation apparat et licne est supprime de lcran des applications. REMARQUE Si une application est supprime, toutes les informations lies cette application seront galement supprimes. 5. Utilisez les flches directionnelles de votre tlcommande pour slectionner licne Terminer. Dplacer les icnes des applications Les applications ne peuvent pas tre dplaces sur lcran. Personnalisation du nom de votre tlviseur Si vous avez plusieurs tlviseurs dans votre maison, vous pouvez personnaliser le nom de votre tlviseur. En donnant votre tlviseur un nom, il sera plus ais de lidentifier lorsque vous connectez des appareils au tlviseur pour couter ou voir du contenu. Pour personnaliser le nom de votre tlviseur :
1. Appuyez sur la touche [
2. Appuyez sur la touche [ > ] pour afficher le menu Rglages. 3. Allez Rseau > Nom du tlviseur. 4. Slectionnez Saisie Utilisateur pour faire apparatre le clavier et commencer taper le nom. 5. Lorsque vous avez termin, teignez le tlviseur et rallumez-le pour que les changements prennent effet.
] de votre tlcommande. 26 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Utiliser Anyview Cast pour reproduire du contenu de votre priphrique mobile sur lcran de votre tlviseur Anyview Cast est une application qui vous permet de partager (ou de visionner) une vido, un morceau de musique ou des photos depuis votre Smartphone sous Android au tlviseur. Depuis votre tablette ou tlphone Pour diffuser le contenu de votre tablette sur votre tlviseur :
1. laide de votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [
pour afficher le menu Rglage. Slectionnez Rseau > Configuration rseau et slectionnez Wi-Fi. 2. Appuyez sur la touche [
3. Activez la fonction daffichage Wi-Fi sur votre priphrique sous Android.
] sur votre tlcommande et slectionnez lapplication Anyview Cast.
] de votre tlcommande puis appuyez sur la touche [ > ]
REMARQUE
(Cast). Certains priphriques sous Android ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction de diffusion sur un deuxime cran 4. Trouvez votre tlviseur dans la liste des priphriques qui saffiche, puis slectionnez-le. 5. Attendez que la barre de progression Cration de la connexion se termine sur lcran du tlviseur et la vido ou limage saffichera dans un instant. 27 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Mises jour du logiciel de votre tlviseur Le logiciel (appel galement firmware) donne une partie de la puissance votre tlviseur. Nous offrirons en permanence des mises jour logicielles pour amliorer votre tlviseur et pour corriger les problmes qui pourraient avoir un impact sur votre exprience dutilisateur. Nous vous recommandons, par consquent, de conserver votre tlviseur connect Internet pour recevoir automatiquement les mises jour lorsquelles sont disponibles. Vous pouvez choisir de recevoir les mises jour automatiquement ou de vrifier les mises jour logicielles et de les installer manuellement. REMARQUE Lorsque votre tlviseur effectue une mise jour, veuillez ne pas interrompre le processus (y compris dteindre ou dallumer les connexions Internet ni le tlviseur). Vrification automatique des mises jour Pour que votre tlviseur puisse recevoir automatiquement les notifications de mises jour logicielles, il doit tre Activer et connect Internet. Le rglage de Mise jour automatique du Firmware (qui permet votre tlviseur de recevoir automatiquement les mises jour) est Activer par dfaut. Lorsque votre tlviseur est allum et que la vrification des mises jour est en cours, le programme que vous REMARQUE regardez ne sera pas interrompu. Dsactivation la fonctionnalit de mise jour automatique du firmware Si vous ne voulez pas que votre tlviseur effectue une vrification automatique des mises jour et quil ne reoive pas des notifications quand elles sont disponibles, vous devez :
1. laide de votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [
]. 2. Appuyez sur la touche [ > ] pour afficher le menu Rglages. 3. Allez sur A propos de la TV > Mise jour automatique du Firmware et dsactivez la fonction Dsactiver. En faisant cela, vous devrez vrifier manuellement la disponibilit de la dernire mise jour logicielle. Vrification de la dernire version du firmware Pour vrifier manuellement la dernire version du firmware :
1. laide de votre tlcommande, appuyez sur la touche [
]. 2. Appuyez sur la touche [ > ] pour afficher le menu Rglages. 3. Rendez-vous sur A propos de la TV > Vrifier les mises jour du Firmware. Installation manuelle de mises jour logiciel Si vous avez dsactiv la Mise jour automatique du Firmware, vous devrez installer manuellement le logiciel. 1. Si lcran de Vrifier les mises jour du Firmware montre quune mise jour est disponible, vous devez slectionner licne de Mise jour. 2. Une fois le logiciel tlcharg, slectionnez licne OK pour lancer la mise jour. 28 FRANAIS ENGLISH ESPAOL Rapides Conseils de Rsolution de Problmes Lorsque vous rencontrez un problme avec votre tlviseur, teignez-le et rallumez-le. Si cela ne rsout pas le problme, rfrez-vous alors aux conseils lists ci-dessous. Si le problme persiste, contactez-nous. PROBLMES SOLUTIONS POSSIBLES Vrifiez que le cordon dalimentation est bien branch une prise de courant.
] de la tlcommande pour activer lappareil en Veille. Appuyez sur la touche [
Vrifiez si la lumire LED est allume ou pas. Si cest le cas, alors le tlviseur est bien branch. Pas de son ni dimage Mon tlviseur est bien branch une source externe et je ne vois pas dimage et/ou je nentends aucun son Lorsque jallume mon tlviseur, il y a quelques secondes de retard avant que limage napparaisse. Est-ce normal?
Limage est normale, mais pas de son Son mais aucune image, ou bien image en noir et blanc Son et image dforms ou apparaissant onduls Son et image flous ou coups momentanment Bande horizontale / verticale sur limage ou limage tremble Le coffret en plastique fait un clic comme type de son La tlcommande ne fonctionne pas Vrifiez que la bonne connexion de sortie est bien branche la source externe et que la bonne connexion dentre est bien connecte au tlviseur. Assurez-vous que vous avez fait le bon choix du mode dentre pour le signal entrant. Oui, cela est normal. Le tlviseur recherche des informations de rglage prcdent et initialise le tlviseur. Vrifiez les rglages du volume. Vrifiez si le mode Muet est rgl sur Activer. Sil y a une image en noir et blanc, dbranchez dabord le tlviseur de la prise secteur et rebranchez-le aprs 60 secondes. Vrifiez que la couleur est rgle sur 50 ou plus. Essayez diffrentes chanes de tlvision. Un appareil lectrique peut tre en train daffecter le tlviseur. teignez tous les appareils, si linterfrences disparat, dplacez lappareil loin du tlviseur. Insrez la fiche dalimentation du tlviseur dans une autre prise de courant. Si vous utilisez une antenne externe, vrifiez la direction, la position et la Ajustez la direction de votre antenne, rinitialisez ou rglez plus finement la connexion de lantenne. chane. Vrifiez quil ny a pas de source dinterfrence voisine, comme un appareil ou un outil lectrique. Le son Clic peut tre caus lorsque la temprature du tlviseur change. Cette modification entrane la dilatation ou la contraction du coffret du tlviseur, ce qui produit ce son. Cela est normal et le tlviseur fonctionne donc bien. Vrifiez que le tlviseur est toujours branch et est oprationnel. Changez les piles de la tlcommande. Vrifiez que les piles sont correctement installes. REMARQUE Pour lutilisation au Mexique, le fonctionnement de cet quipement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) il est possible que cet dispositif ne provoque aucune interfrence nuisible et 2) ce dispositif peut tre sujet toute forme dinterfrence, y compris celles qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. 29 FRANAIS MANUAL DE USUARIO Lea cuidadosamente el manual y asegrese de comprender completamente el contenido antes de operar este dispositivo por primera vez. ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Declaracin De Derechos de Autor PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. Todos Los Derechos Reservados. Todo el material en este manual de usuario es de propiedad de Hisense Company Ltd. y sus subsidiarias, y est protegido bajo los derechos de autor internacionales y/o otras leyes de propiedad intelectual en EE.UU. La reproduccin o transmisin de los materiales, total o parcialmente, de una manera, electrnica, impresa o de alguna otra forma, sin el previo consentimiento escrito de Hisense Company Ltd. es una violacin de los derechos de Hisense Company Ltd. en virtud de las leyes antes mencionadas. Ninguna parte de esta publicacin puede ser almacenada, copiada, transmitida o distribuida, total o parcialmente, de ninguna manera, electrnica u otro medio, sea o no por un cargo u otro o ninguna consideracin, sin el previo consentimiento escrito de Hisense Company Ltd. Las solicitudes de autorizacin para almacenar, copiar, transmitir o distribuir materiales pueden ser realizados a una de las siguientes direcciones:
EE.UU.: Hisense USA Corporation CANAD: Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 MXICO: Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Sharp, Aquos, Quattron as como otros nombres de producto de Sharp, eslogan del logotipo o marcas son marcas comerciales registradas pertenecientes en exclusiva a Sharp Corporation. Hisense, y cualquiera o el resto de nombres de producto de Hisense, logotipos, eslogan o marcas son marcas comerciales y marcas registradas de Hisense Company Ltd. y sus subsidiarias. Este producto es vendido bajo una o ms acuerdos de licencia entre Sharp Corporation y Hisense International (Hong Kong) America Investment Co. Ltd. Todas las marcas comerciales son propiedad de sus respectivos propietarios. Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. 1 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Pgina De Descargo De Responsabilidad
**No obstante lo que disponga al contrario, incluida cualquier o todas las descripciones, representaciones, declaraciones u otras comunicaciones relacionadas con este dispositivo Sharp, Aquos o Quattron (en lo sucesivo Dispositivo) realizadas en cualquier forma y en cualquier momento, algunos o todos los Servicios de aplicacin preinstalados o subsecuentemente instalados podran no estar disponibles o no funcionar como pretende el proveedor de los Servicios de aplicacin en cualquiera o todas las reas de uso por razones ajenas al control de los licenciantes o fabricante del dispositivo, incluido pero no limitado, el acceso a Internet, limitaciones de servicio local, etc. Cualquier compra o uso del Dispositivo, incluido cualquiera de los Servicios de aplicacin, corre bajo riesgo del usuario exclusivamente. Los Servicios de Aplicacin son proporcionados segn su disponibilidad sin garanta de ningn tipo, ya sea expresada o implcitamente, que el Servicio de aplicacin ser ininterrumpido o no tendr errores, incluido pero no limitado a las inclemencias del clima, suspensin del Servicio, desastres naturales, garantas de ttulo, limitaciones locales o regionales, sin violaciones, NI GARANTAS IMPLCITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD O IDONEIDAD PARA UN PROPSITO EN PARTICULAR. Ningn consejo o informacin proporcionados por los licenciantes o fabricantes, afiliados, o contratistas o sus respectivos empleados representa una garanta. Todos los licenciantes as como el fabricante de este dispositivo, conjuntamente o por separado, descargan especficamente cualquiera y toda responsabilidad por cualquier o todos los Servicios de aplicacin en relacin con el funcionamiento en todo momento, y mediante la compra del Dispositivo, usted acepta dicho descargo de responsabilidad sin queja alguna sobre los licenciantes y fabricantes. Usted es el nico responsable en proporcionar una conexin activa y en funcionamiento a Internet, junto con cualquier o todos el hardware y/o software necesarios para usar el Dispositivo como se pretende. Descargo de responsabilidad:
Las imgenes de este documento son solamente ilustrativas y pueden diferir del producto real. 2 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Tabla de Contenidos Tabla de Contenidos ..........................................................................................3 Conectando Dispositivos a su Televisor .........................................................5 Conectando una antena, cable decodificador o receptor satelital ...........................................5 Conectando un receptor satelital, un reproductor de DVD u otro dispositivo Audio Visual (AV) con un cable de video compuesto (Amarillo/Rojo/Blanco)........................................................5 Conectando un dispositivo AV con un cable de video componente (Rojo/Azul/Verde) ...........6 Conectando un dispositivo AV con un cable HDMI...................................................................6 Conexin de un dispositivo habilitado con MHL ......................................................................7 Conexin de audfonos ..............................................................................................................7 Conexin de altavoces u otros receptores de audio .................................................................7 Conectando una barra de sonido digital para usar Canal de Retorno de Audio (ARC) ...........8 Conexin de un dispositivo USB................................................................................................8 Conexin del TV a una red por cable o inalmbrica9 Conexin a una red inalmbrica ...............................................................................................9 Conexin a una red por cable (Ethernet).................................................................................10 Uso del mando a distancia del TV ..................................................................11 Botones del mando de su TV ...................................................................................................11 Informacin de Rango del Control remoto ...............................................................................11 Empiece a usar su control remoto ...........................................................................................12 Finalizacin del men de configuracin inicial ............................................13 Instrucciones de acceso directo ....................................................................15 Encendido o apagado del TV ..................................................................................................15 Seleccin de la Fuente de Entrada ..........................................................................................15 Uso de Live TV .........................................................................................................................15 Ajustes bsicos ................................................................................................17 Uso del men de Ajustes .........................................................................................................17 Men de Imagen ......................................................................................................................18 Men Sonido ............................................................................................................................19 Men Canal ..............................................................................................................................19 Men de Red ...........................................................................................................................20 Men de Sistema .....................................................................................................................20 Acerca del men del TV ..........................................................................................................21 Control parental .......................................................................................................................22 3 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Ajustes avanzados del TV ...............................................................................24 Familiarizarse con la pantalla de Inicio ....................................................................................24 Entradas ...................................................................................................................................24 Multimedia ................................................................................................................................25 Aplicaciones ............................................................................................................................26 Uso de Anyview Cast para reflejar el contenido de su dispositivo en la pantalla del TV ........27 Actualizacin de software de su TV .........................................................................................28 Solucin de problemas ...................................................................................29 4 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conectando Dispositivos a su Televisor Usted tiene muchas opciones para conectar su Televisor a diferentes dispositivos. El mtodo de conexin se basar en el tipo de cables que usted tenga y las salidas disponibles en su dispositivo. Conectando una antena, cable decodificador o receptor satelital Para conectar una antena, cable decodificador o receptor satelita:
1. Conecte una terminal de un cable coaxial (no incluido) al puerto RF OUT de la antena, cable o satlite. Si est usando una antena con cable de dos conductores, tal vez necesite un adaptador de 300 a 75 Ohmios (no proporcionado) para conectarlo detrs de su televisor. De la misma manera, si est usando varias antenas, tal vez necesite un combinador (no proporcionado). 2. Conecte el otro extremo del cable en el puerto ANT/CABLE a un costado de su TV. 3. Usando su control remoto, presione el botn [INPUT] y seleccione Televisor como fuente de entrada. PUERTO DE TV ANT/CABLE o DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO Cable Set top box ANT OUT RF Out Conectando un receptor satelital, un reproductor de DVD u otro dispositivo Audio Visual (AV) con un cable de video compuesto (Amarillo/Rojo/
Blanco) Para conectar un dispositivo AV con un cable de video compuesto (no proporcionado):
1. Use los cables de audio y vdeo para conectar los puertos de vdeo/audio del dispositivo de AV externo a los puertos AV IN del TV. (Vdeo = Amarillo, Audio Izquierda = Blanco y Audio Derecho = Rojo) 2. Enchufe los dispositivos conectados a los conectores AV en el Televisor antes de encenderlo. 3. Usando el control remoto, presione el botn [INPUT] y seleccione AV como fuente de entrada. PUERTO DE TV R N I V A L O E D V I Rojo (R) Blanco(L) Cable de Audio Rojo (R) Blanco (L) Amarillo o Verde (Vdeo) Amarillo (Vdeo) Cable de vdeo DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO VCR DVD Reproductor/Grabador Cmara de Video Decodificador Cable de Antena por Satlite Receptor Satelital R L Video AV OUT 5 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conectando un dispositivo AV con un cable de video componente (Rojo/
Azul/Verde) Para conectar un dispositivo AV con un cable de video componente (no proporcionado):
1. Use un cable de video componente para conectar los puertos de salida del componente del dispositivo externo a los puertos YPBPR para el Televisor. (Y = Verde, PB = Azul y PR = Rojo). Use un cable de audio para conectar los puertos de salida del componente del dispositivo externo a los puertos AUDIO (L/R) del Televisor. 2. Enchufe los dispositivos conectados en los puertos YPBPR y L/R en el Televisor antes de encenderlo. 3. Use su control remoto, presione el botn [INPUT] y seleccione COMPONENTE como la fuente de entrada. PUERTO DE TV R NL I T N E N O P M O C R P B P Y Rojo (R) Blanco (L) Rojo (PR/CR) Cable de Audio Rojo (R) Blanco (L) Rojo (PR/CR) Azul (PB/CB) Cable de componente Azul (PB/CB) Verde (Y) Verde (Y) DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO VCR DVD Reproductor/Grabador Cmara de Video Decodificador Cable de Antena por Satlite R L PR PB Y Component Receptor Satelital Un dispositivo AV puede ser conectado al Televisor usando un video componente o un cable de video NOTA compuesto. Conectando un dispositivo AV con un cable HDMI Este TV 4K tiene dos distintas versiones de software de puertos HDMI para conectar los dispositivos con HDMI. Las dos entradas de alta potencia HDMI versin 2.0 (HDMI 3, HDMI 4) le permiten conectar dispositivos externos Ultra-HD 4K que requieren un ancho de banda superior para transmitir en la pantalla del TV. Por ejemplo, si cuenta con un X-Box o reproductor Blu-ray que sea compatible con el estndar 2.0. Las dos entradas HDMI versin 1.4 son grandiosas para cualquier dispositivo externo que sea compatible con la resolucin de alta definicin estndar de 1080p. Por favor, consulte el Manual de Usuario que viene con su dispositivo para obtener las instrucciones paso a paso. Para conectar un dispositivo AV con un cable HDMI (no proporcionado):
1. Use un cable HDMI para conectar el Puerto de salida HDMI del dispositivo de audio al puerto HDMI del Televisor. 2. Conecte los dispositivos conectados al puerto HDMI del TV antes de encenderlos. 3. Usando su control remoto, presione el botn [INPUT] y seleccione la correspondiente entrada HDMI. PUERTO DE TV I M D H Cable HDMI I M D H DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO DVD Decodificador NOTAS Debido a que el conector HDMI provee seales de audio y video, no es necesario conectar un cable de audio. La recomendamos usar el cable HDMI con 2 ncleos de ferrita como se muestra en la figura. 6 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conexin de un dispositivo habilitado con MHL Puede conectar un dispositivo habilitado con MHL, tales como un telfono mvil y vea la pantalla de su dispositivo en el TV. 1. Conecte un extremo del cable HDMI a MHL (no proporcionado) en el puerto micro USB en el dispositivo. PUERTO DE TV L H M M D H I 2. Conecte el otro extremo del cable en la toma HDMI/MHL. 3. Seleccione la fuente correspondiente del TV. Cable HDMI a MHL DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO Telfono NOTAS Esta funcin podra no estar disponible, dependiendo de la serie de su TV. La recomendamos usar el cable MHL con 2 ncleos de ferrita como se muestra en la figura. Conexin de audfonos Puede conectar audfonos (no proporcionados) al puerto AUDIO OUT de su TV. Cuando estn conectados los audfonos, el sonido de los altavoces integrados ser deshabilitado. PUERTO DE TV DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO
/
AUDIO OUT Auriculares Conexin de altavoces u otros receptores de audio Para conectar altavoces u otros audio receptores con un cable de audio (no proporcionados):
1. Use un cable de audio para conectar el puerto DIGITAL AUDIO IN del dispositivo receptor de audio al puerto DIGITAL AUDIO OUT del Televisor. Otra opcin es usar un cable RCA Y (1/8-mini estreo a fono RCA L/R) para conectar un sistema anlogo de sonido al puerto AUDIO OUT del Televisor. 2. Enchufe los dispositivos conectados al puerto de corriente principal antes de encender el Televisor. PUERTO DE TV DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
/
AUDIO OUT Cable de Audio Cable de Audio Rojo (R) Blanco (L) DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO Barra de Sonido Digital Amplificador de Audio Altavoz de bajo sin potencia Altavoz CONSEJO: Si prefiere usar el Canal de retorno de audio, consulte Conectando una barra de sonido digital para usar Canal de Retorno de Audio (ARC) en la pgina 8. Cuando se conecte un sistema de audio digital en el puerto DIGITAL AUDIO OUT, disminuya el volumen tanto Est disponible el audio de 5.1 canales cuando se conecta el TV a un dispositivo externo compatible con la NOTAS del TV como del sistema. funcionalidad de 5.1 canales. Puede recibir audio 5.1 canales en una de dos formas. La primera opcin es conectar el puerto DIGITAL AUDIO OUT del dispositivo al amplificador. La segunda opcin es conectar el puerto DIGITAL AUDIO OUT de la parte trasera del TV al puerto Optical del amplificador. Despus de completar uno de los dos mtodos, asegrese de ir a la Configuracin avanzada de audio del TV y seleccione RAW para recibir el audio en 5.1 canales. Tambin tendr que realizar los ajustes de sonido o audio de su dispositivo para garantizar que la salida est establecida en 5.1 canales. Podra leerse como Bitstream, RAW o Digital. 7 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conectando una barra de sonido digital para usar Canal de Retorno de Audio (ARC) Si desea usar la funcin Canal de Retorno de Audio (ARC) para tener sonido enviado desde el Televisor desde un cable HDMI a una barra de sonido digital, entonces usted necesitar conectar el cable al puerto HDMI/ARC. Mediante el uso de esta funcin, usted tambin ser capaz de controlar la barra de sonido con su control remoto del Televisor en vez de tener que usar mltiples controles remotos para cada dispositivo. Para conectar sonido digital con un cable HDMI (no proporcionado):
1. Conecte el cable incluido con el dispositivo de sonido en el puerto HDMI/ARC del TV. 2. Encienda la barra de sonido presionando el botn de encendido. 3. Pulse el botn [
] del mando a distancia y pulse el botn [ > ] del mando para visualizar el men Ajustes y vaya a Sistema > Funcin HDMI. 4. Active el ajuste Control CEC &MHL. 5. Regrese al Men Ajustes pulsando nuevamente el botn [BACK]. 6. Seleccione Sonido > Configuracin avanzada de audio. 7. Vaya a la seccin de la pantalla que muestra Altavoz y ARC del TV y seleccione Primero ARC. NOTAS Solamente los dispositivos de sonido digital que requieren una conexin por cable son compatibles con el TV. Si el dispositivo cuenta con la funcin selectora de Entrada y enseguida asegrese de cambiarlo a TV. PUERTO DE TV DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO I M D H C R A Cable HDMI I M D H Barra de Sonido Digital Conexin de un dispositivo USB Puede conectar los dispositivos USB, tales como discos duros, memorias USB y cmaras digitales, para explorar fotos, escuchar msica y ver vdeos grabados. 1. Conecte un dispositivo USB al puerto USB. 2. Seleccione el tipo de medio en la pantalla Multimedia o en la pantalla Inicio. Para obtener ms informacin, consulte Multimedia en la pgina 25. PUERTO DE TV DISPOSITIVO EXTERNO USB USB DC 5V 1A(MAX) DC 5V 0.5A(MAX) NOTAS Cuando conecte un disco duro o un concentrador USB, siempre conecte el adaptador de corriente del dispositivo conectado al suministro de alimentacin. Exceder el consumo total de corriente puede ocasionar daos. Los dispositivos USB1.1 y USB2.0 tienen un consumo mximo de corriente de 500 mA. El consumo mximo de corriente del dispositivo USB3.0 es de 1A. Para discos duros mviles de alta capacidad no estndar, si la corriente de impulso es superior a o igual a 1A, podra ocasionar el reinicio del TV o el auto bloqueo. Por lo tanto el TV no es compatible. El puerto USB es compatible con un voltaje de 5V. 8 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conexin del TV a una red por cable o inalmbrica Tiene la opcin de conectar el TV a una red almbrica o inalmbrica para tener acceso a Internet. Para obtener ms informacin sobre los ajustes de red en el TV, consulte Men de Red en la pgina 20. Conexin a una red inalmbrica Nuestro adaptador de LAN inalmbrico integrado es compatible con los protocolos de comunicacin IEEE 802.11 ac/b/
g/n y le recomendamos que use un enrutador IEEE 802.11n o IEEE 802.11ac. Cuando reproduce un vdeo en una conexin IEEE 802.11 b/g, es posible que no se reproduzca el vdeo correctamente. Enrutador inalmbrico Puerto LAN en la pared Adaptador inalmbrico integrado en el TV Cable LAN NOTAS Debe usar el adaptador de LAN inalmbrico integrado de SHARP para usar una red inalmbrica porque el ajuste no es compatible con el adaptador de red USB externo. Para usar una red inalmbrica, el TV debe estar conectado a un dispositivo de uso compartido de IP inalmbrica. Si usa un dispositivo para compartir IP inalmbrico que sea compatible con el protocolo de configuracin de host dinmica (DHCP), el TV podr usar una direccin con IP esttico o DHCP para conectarse a redes inalmbricas. Seleccione un canal para el dispositivo usado para compartir IP inalmbrico que no sea el que est en uso. Si se establece el canal en uso por otro dispositivo cercano para el dispositivo usado para compartir IP inalmbrico, se producir interferencia y fallos de comunicacin. Si usa un sistema de seguridad distinto a los sistemas listados a continuacin, no funcionar con el TV. Si selecciona el modo High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11N y el tipo de cifrado se establece en WEP, TKIP o TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixto) para el punto de acceso (AP), el TV de SHARP no podr establecer una conexin en conformidad con las especificaciones de certificacin Wi-Fi. Si su punto de acceso (AP) es compatible con la configuracin Wi-Fi protegida (WPS), puede conectarse a la red por medio de la configuracin por botn (PBC) o por PIN (Nmero de identificacin personal). El WPS configurar de forma automtica el SSID y la clave WPA en cualquier modalidad. 9 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Conexin a una red por cable (Ethernet) Puede conectar su TV a su LAN usando uno de los siguientes mtodos:
Opcin 1 Puede conectar su TV a su LAN conectando el puerto LAN de su TV a un mdem externo usando un cable LAN Cat 5. Vea la ilustracin de abajo. PUERTO DE TV Mdem externo
(ADSL / VDSL / TV por cable) Puerto de mdem en la pared LAN Cable Ethernet Cable de mdem Opcin 2 Puede conectar su TV a su LAN conectando el puerto LAN de la parte trasera de su TV en un dispositivo de uso compartido de IP el cual est conectado a un mdem externo. Use un cable Ethernet para la conexin. Vea la ilustracin de abajo. PUERTO DE TV compartidor IP (enrutador IP)
(con servidor DHCP) Mdem externo
(ADSL / VDSL / TV por cable) Puerto de mdem en la pared LAN Cable Ethernet Cable Ethernet Cable de mdem Opcin 3 Dependiendo de cmo est configurada la red, es posible conectar su TV a su LAN conectando el puerto LAN de su TV directamente a la toma de corriente de la red usando un cable Ethernet. Vea el diagrama de abajo. Puerto LAN en la pared PUERTO DE TV LAN Cable Ethernet Si cuenta con una red dinmica, debe usar un mdem ADSL o enrutador que sea compatible con el Protocolo de Configuracin de Host Dinmico (DHCP). Los mdems y enrutadores que son compatibles con DHCP proporcionan de forma automtica la direccin IP, la mscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS, de tal modo que no tiene que introducirlos manualmente. La mayora de las redes son redes dinmicas. Algunas redes requieren una direccin de IP esttica. Si su red requiere una direccin de IP esttica, debe introducir la direccin de IP, la mscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y los valores de DNS manualmente en la pantalla de configuracin de cable del TV cuando configure la conexin de red. Para obtener la direccin de IP, mscara de subred, puerta de enlace y los valores de DNS, pngase en contacto con su Proveedor de Servicios de Internet (ISP). NOTA Puede usar mdems ADSL que sean compatibles con DHCP si su red requiere una direccin de IP esttica. Los mdems ADSL que son compatibles con DHCP tambin le permiten usar direcciones de IP estticas. 10 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Uso del mando a distancia del TV Botones del mando de su TV Transmisor infrarrojo Encendido/Apagado INPUT Cambiar la fuente de entrada del TV Ingresar canales/nmeros de entrada Activar/desactivar subttulos CC El botn de acceso directo para el men de configuracin rpida Botones de navegacin
(arriba/abajo/izquierda/derecha) del teclado OK Regresar a la opcin anterior en el men o aplicacin BACK EXIT Botn de guion Seleccin de un canal secundario digital Botones especiales de funcin Todas las aplicaciones Botn para confirmar Visualizar la pantalla de inicio Salir de la aplicacin Live TV Volumen (subir/bajar) VOL CH Canal (arriba/abajo) Silenciar y reactivar el sonido Botones de funcin de control de contenido de media SLEEP Ajustar el temporizador de apagado Botones de acceso rpido a aplicaciones Informacin de Rango del Control remoto El control remoto puede funcionar a una distancia de hasta 26 pies en frente del Televisor. Puede funcionar en un ngulo vertical u horizontal de 30 grado. 11 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Empiece a usar su control remoto 1. Deslice la cubierta posterior para abrir el compartimento de las pilas del control remoto. 1 2 3 Presione y deslice suavemente Inserte las bateras Presione y deslice suavemente 2. Inserte dos pilas tamao AAA. Asegrese que las terminales (+) y (-) de las pilas, coincidan con las terminales (+) y (-) indicadas en el compartimento de las pilas. 3. Coloque la cubierta del compartimento de las pilas. NOTAS Deseche las pilas en un rea designada para su desecho. No las arroje al fuego. Retire las pilas usadas inmediatamente para evitar que derramen en el compartimento de las pilas. Si no va a usar su control remoto durante mucho tiempo, retire las pilas. Los productos qumicos de las pilas pueden causar alergia. Si las pilas se derraman, limpie el compartimento de stas con un pao. Si los productos qumicos de las pilas entran en contacto con su piel lavarse inmediatamente. No mezcle pilas viejas con nuevas. No mezcle pilas alcalinas, estndar (carbn-zinc) o recargables (NiCd, NiMH, etc.). No contine usando el control remoto si se pone caliente o recalienta. Llame a nuestro Centro de Soporte inmediatamente el sitio web de soporte SHARP. Programe Su Cable Universal o Control Remoto Satelital para Operar Su Nuevo Televisor SHARP (slo aplica para EE.UU.) Si usted quisiera programar otros mandos a distancia de su nuevo Televisor SHARP, por favor consulte el Manual de Usuario suministrado por su proveedor de Cable o Satlite. El Manual del Usuario del proveedor de Cable o Satlite debera incluir instrucciones sobre cmo programar el control remoto a su televisor. Una lista de cdigos SHARP para los proveedores ms comunes de Cable y Satlite se enumeran a continuacin. Use el cdigo SHARP que est asociado con su proveedor de Cable o Satlite (Si es Aplicable). DIRECTV 0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable 386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 Comcast 0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications 0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network 505, 627, 538, 720, 659 Si el cdigo SHARP asociado con su proveedor de Cable o Satlite no est en la lista, no funciona o usted puede localizar las instrucciones para programar su control remoto, llame al centro de servicio de atencin al cliente de su proveedor local de Cable o Satlite. Si su proveedor de Cable o Satlite no tiene un cdigo SHARP disponible, por favor contctenos. Usando Su Decodificador o Receptor Satelital Remoto como su Control Remoto Universal Si usted prefiere usar su Decodificador o Receptor Satelital Remoto como un Control Remoto Universal, visite la pgina de Soporte para ver una lista de cdigos. 12 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Finalizacin del men de configuracin inicial
] en el mando a distancia para encender el TV. Pulse el botn [
Despus de que aparezca la pantalla que muestra el logotipo de SHARP, inicie el men de configuracin inicial. Pantalla Tarea IDIOMA Y LOCALIZACIN Idioma Espaol Pas Mxico Zona horaria Oriental Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho TRMINOS DEL SERVICIO Acepte todos El EULA y Condiciones se deben aceptar para poder connuar. Acepte EULA Acepte los Terms de ... Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho MODO DE USO TV Modo TV Modo domsco Modo domsco En el Modo domsco, el televisor ajustar autom-
camente el brillo de la pantalla en funcin de la luz ambiental en la sala. Este modo consume menos energa. Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho 13 1. El uso de las flechas de navegacin de su mando, seleccione Idioma, Pas y Zona horaria. 2. Navegue con la flecha de Adelante y pulse [OK]. CONSEJO: El borde de las casillas desplegables y las flechas atrs y siguiente cambian a color azul cuando las seleccione. 1. Pulse [OK] para seleccionar Acepte todos. 2. Cuando finalice, navegue con la flecha de Adelante y pulse
[OK]. Seleccione Modo domstico
(opcin predeterminada). A continuacin, navegue con la flecha de Adelante y pulse [OK]. NOTA Modo Tienda slo debe ser seleccionado por distribuidores que planean demostrar el TV. ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Pantalla CONEXIN DE RED Ethernet Wi Seleccionar una Red A2F4-05 A3F6-01 A6F5-19 A1F2-02 A2F4-03 A2F5-01 R22 Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho FUENTE DE ENTRADA DE LIVE TV TV AV COMPONENTE HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho FELICIDADES!
El televisor est listo para su uso Espaol Mxico Oriental Modo Domsco Wi TV OK Idioma Condiciones Moda Red Entrada Hecho 14 Tarea Si su TV no detecta automticamente una conexin Ethernet, enseguida seleccione Wifi. Cuando finalice, seleccione su red de la lista y pase a la siguiente pantalla. Seleccione la forma en la que recibe los canales del TV. Seleccione entre una de las siguientes fuentes y pase a la siguiente pantalla. TV AV COMPONENTE HDMI NOTA Si usa una antena para recibir canales, debe completar la configuracin del men inicial para poder ejecutar la exploracin de canales. Pulse [OK] de su mando a distancia si est de acuerdo con lo que aparece en la pantalla. De lo contrario, navegue con la flecha de retroceso de la pantalla para cambiar su seleccin. ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Instrucciones de acceso directo Puede usar los accesos directos del mando a distancia para agilizar las operaciones. Encendido o apagado del TV Para encender el TV:
1. Conecte el cable de alimentacin de la parte trasera del TV, enseguida conecte el cable de alimentacin en una toma de corriente de CA. 2. Cuando est encendido el TV, pulse el botn [
Para apagar el TV, puse el botn [
].
] del mando a distancia para encender el TV. Cuando su TV se encuentra en el modo de espera, an estar consumiendo alimentacin. Para desconectar por completo la alimentacin, desconecte la clavija de la toma de corriente CA. Si su televisor no recibe una seal de entrada durante varios minutos, entra en modo de espera de forma NOTAS automtica. Seleccin de la Fuente de Entrada Seleccione la fuente de entrada segn el dispositivo de vdeo que haya conectado al televisor. Para seleccionar la fuente de entrada:
1. Encienda el televisor y, a continuacin, pulse el botn [INPUT] en el mando a distancia, la lista de Fuentes aparece. 2. Pulse los botones [< / >] para seleccionar la fuente de entrada. 3. Pulse el botn [OK] para confirmar su seleccin. Uso de Live TV Para ver programas de emisoras, pulse el botn [Live TV] en el mando a distancia. Gua de bsqueda de canales Cuando seleccione el TV como entrada, si no se guardaron canales previamente, se le avisar que realice la bsqueda de canales. Antes de iniciar la sintonizacin de canales, debe especificar el modo de sintonizacin, Antena o Cable. Tambin puede ir al Men Ajustes > Canal para cambiar los ajustes del canal. Abrir Live TV Despus de completar la sintonizacin de canales por primera vez, la pantalla mostrar los consejos sobre el funcionamiento de Live TV, incluido: cmo iniciar la lista de canales, cmo iniciar la info de canal, etc. OK Ver info del canal BACK PRE-CH
[OK] Diga en voz alta la lista de canales
[ v ] Ver info del canal
[BACK] Ver canales recientes OK Diga en voz alta la lista de canales 15 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Visualizacin de la informacin del canal Conforme use el botn [CH+/CH-] en su mando a distancia para desplazarse por los canales, aparece un banner de informacin en la parte superior de la pantalla. 4 5 1 2 3 5-2 AT05-2 12:09 AM Jue. 30 de Jun. 6 7 Antena AT05 480i 10:00 PM 1:00 AM 1:00 AM - 4:00 AM AT05 480i 1/1 Desconocido 5.1CH 4:3 480i CC 8 9 10 El banner de informacin muestra la siguiente informacin:
1. Nmero de canal 2. Estado de bloqueo 3. Entrada 4. Nmbre de programa 5. Mostrar identificacin 6. Nombre de canal 7. Fecha y hora actual 8. Aviso 9. Hora de inicio y final del siguiente programa 10. Barra de progreso de inicio/finalizacin del programa actual Si ve un canal en particular, puede tambin pulsar el botn de flecha arriba de su mando para ver la informacin del canal. Visualizacin de la lista de canales Despus de realizar la exploracin automtica de canales (si usa una antena) o si recibe canales a travs de un proveedor de cable, podr ver la lista de canales pulsando [OK] en el mando a distancia. Visualizar la lista de canales en el lado derecho de la pantalla. Creacin de la lista de Favoritos Para acceder rpidamente a los canales ms vistos, puede crear la lista de Favoritos. Para crear la lista de favoritos:
1. Pulse el botn [
2. Pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. 3. Seleccione Canal > Lista de favoritos. 4. Con los botones [ v / v ] del mando seleccione un canal y pulse el botn [OK]. Como confirmacin, junto al canal aparecer un indicador en forma de corazn indicando que se ha agregado exitosamente. Visualizacin de la lista de Favoritos Para ver los canales que ha agregado a su Lista de favoritos simplemente pulse [OK] en el mando a distancia para ver la Lista de canales. La lista de canales aparece en el lado derecho de la pantalla y se muestran iconos en forma de corazn junto a los canales que conforman la lista de Favoritos. Puede pulsar los botones [ < / > ] para cambiar la lista de canales (Antena o Cable) y la lista de Favoritos.
] del mando a distancia. 16 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Ajustes bsicos Su TV SHARP cuenta con muchas funciones de ajuste de TV que le permiten personalizar la imagen basndose en las preferencias de visualizacin y en el entorno. Conforme navegue por las distintas pantallas para tener acceso a los ajustes, algunos indicadores aparecen con las palabras Activado y Desactivado y en algunos casos los smbolos abierto significa que est desactivada la funcin. El indicador y cerrado
] para tener acceso al men Ajustes rpidos, enseguida pulse el botn [ > ] en el teclado Uso del men de Ajustes Puede pulsar el botn [
para ver el men Ajustes. El Men Ajustes consiste de los siguientes ajustes:
Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV En cada men, usted puede:
Pulse los botones [ v / v ] para seleccionar un elemento. Pulse los botones [OK] para ingresar al submen. Pulse los botones [ < / > ] para ajustar el valor. Pulse el botn [BACK] para regresar al men anterior. Pulse el botn [EXIT] para salir del men. Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV Modo de imagen Estndar Brillo 50 Contraste 50 Color 50 Relacin de aspecto Auto Iluminacin de fondo Configuracin avanzada de la imagen Restaurar Predeterminados 17 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV Modo de imagen Estndar Brillo 50 Contraste 50 Color 50 Relacin de aspecto Auto Iluminacin de fondo Men de Imagen Modo de imagen: Si desea configurar los ajustes para su imagen, existen seis tipos de modo de imagen disponibles: Vvido, Estndar, Teatro, Ahorro de energa, Juego y Deporte. Restaurar Predeterminados Configuracin avanzada de la imagen Una vez elegido el modo, puede ajustar la imagen basndose en los siguientes ajustes:
Brillo: Ajustar el nivel de Brillo para generar imgenes ms claras o ms oscuras. Contraste: Ajustar el nivel de Contraste para aumentar o disminuir el brillo con el que aparecen las imgenes. Color: Ajuste la intensidad de color de la imagen para obtener una imagen ms vibrante. Relacin de aspecto: Ajuste la Relacin de aspecto para ampliar o reducir la imagen. Puede seleccionar lo siguiente: Normal, Zoom, Ancho, Cine, MAPA DE PIXEL 1:1, Panormico, Directo y Auto. Iluminacin de fondo: Algunos modelos tienen una configuracin de Control dinmico de la iluminacin de fondo la cual puede cambiar entre Apagado, Alto o Bajo. Algunos modelos tienen un ajuste de Atenuacin local disponible que habilitar el TV para que ajuste de forma automtica la luz de fondo por secciones en conformidad con los cambios de la imagen y aumenta el contraste. El ajuste de la Iluminacin de fondo le permite ajustar la cantidad de brillo que desea aplicar en las imgenes. Adicionalmente, existe el ajuste Sensor ECO que est disponible para permitir que el TV ajuste de forma automtica los ajustes de la imagen en conformidad con la cantidad de luz ambiental de su habitacin. El ajuste de la Iluminacin de fondo mnima le permite ajustar la cantidad de brillo que desea aplicar en las imgenes. Esta es una funcin de ahorro econmico porque reduce el consumo de energa. Configuracin avanzada de la imagen: Ajustar la configuracin avanzada de las imgenes basada en sus preferencias de visualizacin. Visualizacin: Realice la configuracin avanzada de la imagen en la fuente de componente. Sobreescaneo: Cambie la configuracin del tamao de vdeo para recortar ligeramente los bordes de la imagen mostrada. Tono: Ajuste los colores desde verde a magenta para ver los tonos de piel natural de las personas en la pantalla. Nitidez: Ajustar la nitidez o lo atenuado que desea que se vean los bordes de las imgenes. Movimiento ultra suave: Este ajuste minimiza las imgenes posteriores que se dejaron en la pantalla cuando se visualizan objetos de rpido movimiento. Puede ajustar entre Apagado, Claro, Estndar o Suave. El ajuste Suave producir una imagen ms suave y el ajuste Claro generar una imagen con menos movimiento (destello). NOTA Algunos modelos no son compatibles con esta funcin. Reduccin de ruido: Mejorar la claridad de la imagen al reducir el ruido. Contraste Adaptativo: Oscurecer las zonas oscuras y aclarar las reas claras de las imgenes automticamente para ver ms detalles. Temperatura de color: Seleccione una temperatura de color predefinida. Balance de blancos: Ajustar la intensidad de las luces rojas, verdes y azules para ver los verdaderos colores de todas las imgenes en la imagen. Sintonizador de color: Color, la Saturacin y el Brillo de los colores. Restaurar Predeterminados: Restaurar todos los ajustes de imagen en el modo de imagen actual a los valores predeterminados de fbrica. 18 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Men Sonido Modo de sonido: Seleccione el modo de sonido predefinido para que coincida con el tipo de contenido que est escuchando: Estndar, Teatro, Msica, Dilogo y Nocturno. Una vez elegido el modo, puede ajustar el audio basndose en los siguientes ajustes:
Mejoras de audio: La Total Technology proporciona la mejor experiencia posible de su TV. Total Sonics: Optimiza la calidad de sonido en general Modo de sonido Estndar Mejoras de audio Configuracin avanzada de audio Restaurar Predeterminados Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV aumentando los graves, haciendo que los dilogos sean claros y naturales; ampliando de este modo el campo de sonido. Total Surround: Proporciona una experiencia de sonido envolvente con proceso psicoacstico para enviar el sonido a un lado, atrs y en la parte superior del visor. Para obtener mejores resultados con Completamente acstico. Total Volume: Mantiene niveles consistentes de sonoridad desde una amplia gama dinmica de programas, comerciales con mucho ruido y cambios de canal o entrada. Configuracin avanzada de audio: Sintonizar la configuracin de audio y la calidad del TV. Ecualizador: Aumentar el volumen a diferentes frecuencias. Sincr. labios: Sincroniza la imagen mostrada con la salida de audio. Balance: Ajustar la intensidad del altavoz izquierdo y derecho para optimizar el audio en una ubicacin especfica. Salida digital de audio: Seleccione el formato de la salida de audio digital que mejor se adapte al tipo de dispositivo de audio. Por ejemplo, seleccione RAW (que es audio no comprimido en la forma de RAW) si tiene un Sistema de altavoces con sonido envolvente 5.1. Seleccione PCM si tiene un amplificador que no es compatible con la tecnologa Dolby Digital. Retraso audio digital: Ajustar el tiempo de retardo de salida de audio digital para sincronizar el sonido de un altavoz externo con las imgenes en el televisor. Altavoz y ARC del TV: Seleccionar el altavoz del televisor o un altavoz externo para la salida de sonido. Salida de audio: Cambiar la forma en que se enva el audio a travs del tipo de dispositivo que est conectado al puerto de salida de audio de su TV. Restaurar Predeterminados: Restaurar todos las configuraciones de audio en el modo de audio actual a los valores predeterminados de fbrica. Men Canal Modo sintonizador: Seleccione si desea recibir canales de TV por aire
(antena) o a travs de un codificador de cable como entrada durante la exploracin de un canal. Deteccin automtica de canales: Buscar automticamente los canales para ver la programacin de su fuente de TV. Omitir canales: Omitir un canal que el televisor recogi durante una bsqueda anterior de canales. Lista de favoritos: Acceder rpidamente a los canales que ms ve mediante la creacin de una Lista de favoritos. Modo sintonizador Antena Deteccin automtica de canales Omitir canales Lista de favoritos Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV 19 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Men de Red Configuracin de la red: Configurar la red para tener acceso completo a las funciones del TV Inteligente. Cuando el tipo de conexin sea Ethernet, significa que ha seleccionado una conexin de red por cable para tener acceso a Internet. Ethernet: Mostrar el estado de conexin de red. Configuracin de modo IP: Configurar el ajuste de IP para la conexin de red. Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV Configuracin de la red Informacin de la red Desconectado Stream Anyview Encendido Nombre del TV Smart TV Cuando el tipo de conexin sea Inalmbrica, significa que ha seleccionado una conexin de red inalmbrica para tener acceso a Internet. Configuracin avanzada: Configurar los ajustes avanzados de red inalmbrica para el TV. Redes disponibles: Seleccione una red disponible para conectarse. Puede agregar una red inalmbrica o renovar la red inalmbrica. Cuando el tipo de conexin este Apagado, significa que ha desactivado la conexin a Internet. Informacin de la red: Ver informacin sobre su conexin de red. Stream Anyview: Comparta vdeo, msica u otro contenido desde otro dispositivo en la pantalla de su TV. Nombre del TV: Elegir un nombre para su TV. El nombre se mostrar a los dispositivos que estn disponibles para el intercambio de datos. Men de Sistema Ubicacin: Seleccionar la ubicacin desde donde ver el TV. Hora: Establecer la hora actuales en funcin de su ubicacin. Zona horaria: Seleccionar su zona horaria. Formato de hora: Configurar la hora para mostrar un formato de 12 o 24 horas. Horario de verano: Seleccionar si desea aplicar el horario de verano al TV. Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV Ubicacin Mxico Hora Idioma Control parental Configuracin de la aplicacin Subttulos ocultos Funcin HDMI Configuracin avanzada Fecha/Hora: Configurar Fecha y Hora. Temporizador de encendido: Activa el Temporizador de encendido y alterna entre Apagado, Una vez o Diario. Temporizador de apagado: Activa el Temporizador de apagado y alterna entre Apagado, Una vez o Diario. Temporizador de reposo: Ajuste el Temporizador de reposo para que se apague automticamente el TV en el tiempo especificado: Apagado, 10 minutos, 20 minutos, 30 minutos, 40 minutos, 50 minutos, 60 minutos, 90 minutos y 120 minutos. Idioma: Ajuste el Men de idioma y el Idioma preferido de audio para el TV. Control parental: Active el Control parental para bloquear ciertos programas no aptos para nios. La contrasea predeterminada es 0000. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el Control parental, consulte Control parental en la pgina 22. Configuracin de la aplicacin: Configuracin del conjunto de aplicaciones de su TV. Netflix: Eliminar este televisor de su cuenta de Netflix. Pngase en contacto con Netflix si quiere dejar de recibir facturas por su servicio. ESN: Muestra el nmero de serie electrnico de Netflix. VUDU: Eliminar este televisor de su cuenta de VUDU. Pngase en contacto con VUDU si quiere dejar de recibir facturas de su servicio. 20 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Subttulos ocultos: Ajuste los Subttulos. Subttulos analgicos: Seleccione el ajuste de Subttulos analgicos entre Apagado, CC1-CC4, TEXTO1-
TEXTO4. CC1-CC4: Los subttulos ocultos aparecen en una pequea barra en la parte inferior de la pantalla. CC1 usualmente es la versin impresa del audio. CC2-CC4 muestran el contenido proporcionado por la emisora. TEXTO1-TEXTO4: Subttulos ocultos que cubren la mitad o toda la pantalla. TEXTO1-TEXTO4 muestran el contenido proporcionado por el emisor. Apagado: Para desactivar los Subttulos analgicos. Subttulos digitales: Seleccione el ajuste de los Subttulos digitales: Apagado, CS1-CS6. Configuracin de subttulos ocultos digitales: Existen dos estilos de subttulos. Una es la funcin automtica establecida por la emisora, mientras que la otra est personalizada en donde puede ajustar el Tamao, Fuente, Color de texto, Opacidad del texto, Color de fondo, etc. Funcin HDMI: Configure cmo controlar los dispositivos de CEC habilitados con el control remoto del televisor. Control CEC & MHL: Permitir que los dispositivos HDMI se controlen entre s. Dispositivo de desconexin automtica: Apagado automtico de dispositivos CEC HDMI cuando se apaga el TV. Encendido automtico de la TV: Permitir que el televisor se encienda con los dispositivos CEC habilitados. Conexin de dispositivos: Permitir que los dispositivos CEC habilitados se comuniquen entre s cuando se conectan a travs de un cable HDMI. Listas de dispositivos CEC: Ver una lista de todos los dispositivos CEC habilitados. NOTAS control HDMI-CEC. Los cables HDMI deben usarse para conectar dispositivos compatibles con CEC HDMI a su TV. La funcin HDMI-CEC del dispositivo conectado debe estar activada. Si conecta un dispositivo HDMI que no es compatible con CEC HDMI, no funcionarn todas las funciones de Dependiendo del dispositivo HDMI conectado, la funcin de control HDMI-CEC podra no estar disponible. Configuracin avanzada: Acceso al men de Configuracin avanzada. Lmite de tiempo de men: Defina el tiempo que desea visualizar el men: 10s, 20s , 30s , 60s o Apagado. Modo de uso: Ajuste el TV para usar en Modo domstico o Modo Tienda (algunos modelos tienen un Modo Tienda con vdeo 4K). Etiquetas de entrada: Editar las etiquetas de entrada. Fuente de tv en vivo: Seleccione la entrada predeterminada seleccionada por el botn Live TV del mando a distancia. Asistente de configuracin: Utilizar el asistente de configuracin para obtener instrucciones que le ayuden a configurar su TV. Indicador de alimentacin: Ajuste el Indicador de alimentacin para encender el TV cuando est apagado. Acerca del men del TV Informacin de sistema: Ver informacin del sistema. Descargo de responsabilidad legal: Lea el Descargo de responsabilidad legal. Actualizacin automtica del Firmware: Configurar su televisor para recibir automticamente la ltima versin del firmware. Comprobar la actualizacin de firmware: Comprobar para asegurarse de que su TV ha recibido el ltimo firmware. Restaurar a los valores de fbrica: Restaurar el televisor a la configuracin predeterminada de fbrica. Ajustes Imagen Sonido Canal Red Sistema Acerca TV Informacin de sistema Descargo de responsabilidad legal Actualizacin automtica del Firmware Encendido Comprobar la actualizacin de firmware Restaurar a los valores de fbrica 21 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Control parental El ajuste Control parental le permite bloquear el contenido que no es apropiado para nios. Puede realizar esto creando un cdigo de acceso de 4 dgitos. El cdigo de acceso predeterminado es 0000. Encendido del Control parental 1. Pulse el botn [
2. Pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. 3. Seleccione Sistema > Control parental. 4. Pulse el botn [OK] en el mando a distancia: se visualiza una ventana para Introduzca PIN. Con el teclado numrico
] del mando a distancia. de su mando, introduzca la contrasea predeterminada de fbrica 0000 y pulse [OK]. 5. Vaya a Bloqueos. 6. Pulse el botn [OK] para Encendido el bloqueo. Podr visualizar que el resto de ajustes del Control parental cambian de un estado de color gris a uno resaltado. Cuando esto ocurre, empiece a agregar otros ajustes a Tiempo de bloqueo, Bloqueo de canal, Bloqueo de programa, Bloqueo de entrada, Cambiar PIN o Restaurar valores predet. Control parental. Tiempo de bloqueo: Bloquear ciertos canales y programas durante ciertos perodos de tiempo. Bloqueo de canal: Bloquear los programas por canal cuando se enciende la funcin de control parental. Bloqueo de programa: Bloque programas en conformidad con su TV o clasificacin MPAA (vdeo) cuando tenga activada la funcin Control parental y haya seleccionado la clasificacin que ser bloqueada. Bloqueo de entrada: Bloquear el contenido de los dispositivos que estn conectados a ciertos puertos de televisin. Cambiar PIN: Cambiar el PIN que utiliza para acceder a los controles parentales. Si desea cambiar la contrasea de control parental, primero ingrese la nueva contrasea y vuelva a ingresarla para confirmarla. NOTA Si olvida su contrasea, llame al Centro de cuidado de aparatos elctricos para el cliente de SHARP. Restaurar valores predet. Control parental: Restaurar la configuracin del control parental al valor predeterminado de fbrica. Descripcin de clasificacin de TV de EE. UU. Contenido A D L S V FV Definido como Todo Dilogos sugestivos Idioma de curso o crudo Situaciones sexuales Violence Fantasa y Violencia Descripcin de clasificacin basada en la edad Edad TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-G TV-PG TV-14 TV-MA Definido como Todos los nios Dirigido para nios mayores Audiencia en general Sugerido el control parental Bajo la supervisin de los padres Slo para adultos 22 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Clasificacin de vdeos EE.UU. Clasificacin Definido como G PG PG-13 R NC-17 Audiencia en general Sugerido el control parental Bajo la supervisin de los padres Restringido No apto para personas de 17 aos o menores Una clasificacin que ahora ha sido reemplazada por NC-17. X Clasificacin en ingls canadiense Clasificacin Definido como C C8+
Nios Nios de 8 aos y mayores Programacin general que es adecuada para todas las audiencias Control parental Espectadores de 14 aos o mayores Programas para adultos Clasificacin en francs canadiense Clasificacin Definido como G G PG 14+
18+
8ans+
13ans+
16ans+
18ans+
General (apropiado para todas las edades y debe contener muy poca o nada de violencia o contenido sexual). General pero no aconsejable para nios (podra contener escenas que afecten a nios menores a ocho aos). Recomendado para verlo con los padres. Programacin apropiada para nios de 13 aos y mayores y puede contener violencia o lenguaje moderados y algunas situaciones sexuales. Programacin apropiada para nios de 16 aos y mayores y puede contener violencia o lenguaje fuertes y contenido sexual. Programacin para personas de 18 aos y mayores. La programacin podra contener violencia extrema y contenido sexual grfico/pornografa. NOTA Todas las clasificaciones que son superiores a los que ha seleccionado tambin se bloquean. Por ejemplo, si desea bloquear la clasificacin PG-13, entonces la clasificacin superior (R y NC-17) se bloquea de forma automtica tambin. 23 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Ajustes avanzados del TV Familiarizarse con la pantalla de Inicio El diseo simple del men de la pantalla Inicio facilita la navegacin. Sirve como ubicacin central para tener acceso a Premier Aplicaciones, Recomendacin, Historial, Multimedia, Aplicaciones, o Entradas en la parte trasera del TV que ha conectado a dispositivos externos. Para tener acceso a la pantalla Inicio, pulse el botn [
realizar la seleccin.
] en el mando a distancia y use los botones del D-pad para Indicadores e iconos en la parte superior de la pantalla Inicio Siempre puede ver la hora actual en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla Inicio. Si su TV est conectado a Internet a travs de una conexin inalmbrica, el icono se visualizar en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla. Esta ubicacin es muy conveniente para que determine si todava est conectado a Internet durante el uso de su TV. Si su TV est conectado a Internet, en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se visualizarn las condiciones actuales del clima. Adicionalmente, si tiene conectado un dispositivo (como una memoria) en un puerto USB y su TV lo reconoce, tambin se visualizar el icono Nombres de las secciones que aparece en la pantalla Inicio La pantalla Inicio muestra las siguientes secciones:
Premier Aplicaciones Recomendacin Historial Entradas Multimedia Aplicaciones del dispositivo en la misma rea. Entradas Cada vez que tiene acceso a la pantalla Inicio, los iconos de las entradas sern mostrados en la pantalla. Las entradas conectadas a un dispositivo externo estarn resaltadas Las entradas que no estn conectadas a un dispositivo externo estarn en color gris. 24 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Multimedia Multimedia es una ubicacin central para que vea y escuche los distintos tipos de contenido (por ejemplo, fotos, msica y vdeos) a travs de los siguientes mtodos:
Una unidad o disco duro USB. Telfono mvil, tableta u otros dispositivos personales compatibles: Puede transmitir vdeos, imgenes y fotos que estn almacenados en su dispositivo personal compatible y reproducir o ver el contenido en su TV. Cuando conecte su unidad u otro dispositivo personal al TV, el TV automticamente lo detecta y muestra el icono del dispositivo en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla. Paneles que aparecen en la pantalla Multimedia La pantalla Multimedia muestra cuatro paneles: Imagen, Vdeo, Msica y Todo. Formatos de archivo que son compatibles NOTA Debido a las diferencias en las herramientas de programacin y a otros factores, algunos de los formatos de archivo son listados o podran no ser compatibles. Medio Vdeo Imagen Msica Formato de archivos
.avi (MPEG2, Divx), .mkv (Divx), .mpeg (MPEG2), .wmv (Divx, XviD)
.JPG
.mp3 Exploracin de contenido Para explorar a travs del contenido basndose en el tipo que desea acceder:
1. Navegue a la pestaa de men apropiada en el lado izquierdo de la pantalla y seleccione Msica, Vdeo, Imagen o Todo. La biblioteca de elementos se muestra en el lado derecho de la pantalla. 2. Navegue al lado derecho de la pantalla y haga clic en el nombre de la carpeta que contiene el contenido. 3. Realice la seleccin para reproducir o ver el contenido. Si desea cerrar el centro Multimedia, pulse el botn [EXIT] en el mando a distancia. Visualizacin de imgenes como pase de diapositivas Para ver las imgenes como pase de diapositivas:
1. Navegue a la pestaa Imagen. 2. Haga clic en Iniciar pase de diapositivas. Inicia la reproduccin del pase de diapositivas de sus imgenes. Para detener el pase de diapositivas, pulse el botn
[OK] en el mando a distancia y plselo de nuevo para reiniciarlo. Visualizacin de vdeos Mientras visualiza los vdeos podr ver el nmero de iconos en la parte inferior de la pantalla. Puede usar los botones de navegacin del mando a distancia para seleccionar estos iconos que controlarn el vdeo. 25 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Aplicaciones Existe un gran nmero de aplicaciones instaladas de fbrica para que las elija de acuerdo a sus preferencias de entretenimiento. Instalacin de una aplicacin Aunque su TV cuenta con numerosas aplicaciones instaladas de fbrica, es posible que existan otras que puede descargar. Para instalar una aplicacin:
1. Desde la pantalla Inicio, haga clic en el icono Opera TV Store. 2. Navegue a la pestaa Buscar en la parte superior de la pantalla. 3. Inicie escribiendo el nombre de la aplicacin. Conforme escriba las primeras dos o tres letras, Opera Store le sugiere palabras para realizar de forma rpida la bsqueda. 4. Use los botones de navegacin de su mando para seleccionar la aplicacin. Una pgina muestra la descripcin de la aplicacin. 5. Haga clic en ABRIR o AADIR A FAVORITOS. Eliminacin de una aplicacin Solamente puede eliminar aplicaciones que ha descargado al TV. Las aplicaciones instaladas de fbrica no se pueden eliminar. Para eliminar una aplicacin:
1. Desde la pantalla Aplicaciones, haga clic en el icono Editar. 2. Use los botones de navegacin del mando a distancia para seleccionar la aplicacin que desea eliminar. NOTA La aplicacin que tiene el icono en la esquina superior derecha se puede eliminar. 3. Pulse el botn [OK] del mando a distancia. Aparece un mensaje de dilogo que le pregunta si est seguro de que desea eliminar la aplicacin. 4. Haga clic en OK. Aparece un mensaje de confirmacin y se elimina el icono de la pantalla de la lista de Apps. NOTA Si se elimina una aplicacin, la informacin relacionada con esa aplicacin tambin es eliminada. 5. Use los botones de navegacin para seleccionar el icono Completar. Movimiento de los iconos de aplicaciones Las aplicaciones no se pueden mover alrededor de la pantalla. Personalizacin del nombre de su TV Si cuenta con varias TV en su casa, es posible personalizar el nombre de su TV. Al proporcionar un nombre a su TV, se facilitar la identificacin de la misma al conectar dispositivos al TV para transmitir contenido o reflejar el contenido. Para personalizar el nombre de su TV:
1. Pulse el botn [
2. Pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. 3. Vaya a Red > Nombre del TV. 4. Seleccione Entrada de usuario para visualizar el teclado y empezar a escribir el nombre. 5. Cuando haya finalizado, apague el TV y encindalo nuevamente para que el cambio tenga efecto.
] del mando a distancia. 26 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Uso de Anyview Cast para reflejar el contenido de su dispositivo en la pantalla del TV Anyview Cast es una aplicacin que le permite compartir (o transmitir) un vdeo, audio o imagen de su dispositivo Android al TV. Desde su tableta o telfono Para reflejar el contenido de su tableta o telfono en el TV:
1. Usando el mando a distancia, pulse el botn [
], enseguida pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. Vaya a Red > Configuracin de la red y seleccione Inalmbrica. 2. Pulse el botn [
3. Encienda la funcin de visualizacin inalmbrica en su dispositivo basado en Android.
] de su mando a distancia y seleccione la aplicacin Anyview Cast. NOTA Algunos dispositivos Android podran no ser compatibles. 4. Ubique su TV en la lista de dispositivos que se muestra y seleccinela. 5. Espere que se complete la barra de progreso Creacin de la conexin en la pantalla del TV y el vdeo o la imagen sern mostrados en un momento. 27 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Actualizacin de software de su TV El software (tambin referido como firmware) forma parte de su TV. Proporcionaremos actualizaciones de software para mejorar de forma continua su TV y corregir problemas que pueden tener un impacto en su experiencia de usuario; por lo tanto, recomendamos que mantenga conectado su TV a Internet para recibir actualizaciones de forma automtica cuando estn disponibles. Puede seleccionar la recepcin de actualizaciones o comprobar actualizaciones de software e instalarlas manualmente. NOTA Mientras actualiza el TV, no interrumpa el progreso (incluida la desactivacin de la conexin a Internet o el TV). Comprobacin automtica de actualizaciones Para que su TV reciba notificaciones de software de forma automtica, debe estar Encendido y conectada a Internet. La configuracin Actualizacin automtica del Firmware (que habilita su TV para que reciba actualizaciones de forma automtica) est Encendido como ajuste predeterminado. Cuando est encendido su TV y se buscan actualizaciones, el programa que se est visualizando no ser NOTA interrumpido.
]. Desactivacin de la funcin Actualizacin automtica del Firmware Si no desea que su TV compruebe de forma automtica actualizaciones y recibir notificaciones cuando estn disponibles, realice lo siguiente:
1. En el mando a distancia, pulse el botn [
2. Pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. 3. Vaya a Acerca TV > Actualizacin automtica del Firmware y cambie la funcin a Apagado. Al realizar esto, tiene que comprobar manualmente si tiene la actualizacin de software ms reciente. Comprobacin de la ltima versin del firmware Para comprobar manualmente el firmware ms reciente:
1. En el mando a distancia, pulse el botn [
2. Pulse el botn [ > ] para visualizar el men Ajustes. 3. Vaya a Acerca TV > Comprobar la actualizacin de firmware. Instalacin manual de actualizaciones de software Si ha Apagado la funcin Actualizacin automtica del Firmware cuando necesite instalar manualmente el software. 1. Si aparece la pantalla Comprobar la actualizacin de firmware est disponible la versin ms reciente, seleccione
]. el icono Actualizar. 2. Despus de descargar el software, seleccione el icono OK para iniciar el progreso de actualizacin. 28 ESPAOL ENGLISH FRANAIS Solucin de problemas Cuando exista algn problema con su TV, apguelo y vulvalo a encender. Si no se resuelve el problema tambin puede consultar los siguientes consejos. Si el problema persiste, pngase en contacto con nosotros. PROBLEMA POSIBLE SOLUCIN Compruebe si est bien conectado el cable de alimentacin en una toma de No se emite sonido ni imagen He conectado una fuente externa en mi TV y no tengo imgenes ni sonido. Cuando enciendo el TV, existe un retraso de unos segundos antes de que aparezcan las imgenes. Esto es normal?
La imagen es normal pero no se emite sonido. Hay sonido pero no se ve la imagen o se la ve en blanco y negro. El sonido y la imagen estn distorsionados o no son claros El sonido y las imgenes son borrosas o se cortan momentneamente. Existen bandas horizontales/
verticales en la imagen o la imagen parpadea. El recinto de plstico hace un sonido clic. No funciona el mando a distancia corriente de CA. Pulse el botn [
espera. alimentacin.
] en el control remoto para activar la unidad del modode Compruebe si se enciende o no el LED. Si est encendido, el TV est recibiendo Verifique que se haya realizado correctamente la conexin de salida de la fuente externa y la conexin de entrada del TV. Asegrese de que haya realizado correctamente la seleccin del modo de entrada para la seal entrante. S, esto es normal. El TV est buscando informacin de ajuste anterior y est inicializando el TV. Compruebe el ajuste de volumen. Verifique si no se Encendido la funcin de silencio. Si la imagen est en blanco y negro, primero desconecte el TV de la toma de corriente CA y vuelva a conectar despus de 60 segundos. Verifique que el Color est establecido en 50 o ms. Pruebe los diferentes canales del TV. Un aparato elctrico podra estar afectando al TV. Apague los aparatos, si an existe interferencia, aleje el aparato del TV. Inserte la clavija del cable de alimentacin del TV en otra toma de corriente. Si usa una antena externa, verifique la direccin, posicin y conexin de la antena. Ajuste la direccin de la antena o restaure la sintonizacin de canales. Verifique si existe una fuente de interferencia en la cercana, tal como un aparato o herramienta elctrica. El sonido clic puede ser ocasionado al cambiar la temperatura ambiente de la habitacin. Este cambio ocasiona que el recinto del TV se infle o contraiga, y esto produce el sonido. Esto es normal y el TV esta bien. Confirme que el TV est encendido y en funcionamiento. Cambie las bateras del mando a distancia. Verifique si se han instalado correctamente las bateras. NOTA Para usarse en Mxico, la operacin de este equipo se encuentra sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1) es posible que este dispositivo no ocasione interferencia perjudicial, 2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier tipo de interferencia, incluida aquella que pueda ocasionar su mal funcionamiento. 29 ESPAOL
1 | User Manual 7 | Users Manual | 1.41 MiB |
ES-
Hisense H9C Series 4K Ultra High-Definition Smart TV Quick Start Guide Help Hisense improve the environment by reducing paper waste. For detailed instructions and feature descriptions, access the full User Manual online. 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved. All material in this Quick Start Guide is the property of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries, and is protected under US, CANADA, MEXICO and International copyright and/or other intellectual property laws. Reproduction or transmission of the materials, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic, print, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Hisense Company Ltd. is a violation of Hisense Company Ltd. rights under the aforementioned laws. No part of this publication may be stored, reproduced, transmitted or distributed, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic or otherwise, whether or not for a charge or other or no consideration, without the prior written permission of Hisense Company Ltd. Requests for permission to store, reproduce, transmit or distribute materials may be made to one of the following addresses:
USA: Hisense USA Corporation PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 CANADA: Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 MEXICO: Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. Hisense, and any and all other Hisense product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Enjoy 4K TV in a Super Sharp, Super Powerful and Super Smart Way!
Smart LED TV with Popular Features Ultra-fast access to launch Netflix Numerous built-in social media, gaming and movie apps Thousands of movie titles and streaming content to view AirBridge technology to share content between the TV and your mobile device Hisense-developed HiMedia Player to play back digital content that's stored on your USB drive or in a Cloud account Many other cool features High-Quality Picture and Sound Vibrant contrast and brightness to display images accurately Crisp sound and powerful TV speaker output due to dbx-
tv technology 4K technology that supports 4K online streaming, 4K USB content, HDMI 2.0 devices and much more to maximize your entertainment experience HDR processing and Multi-zone local dimming 1 Multiple Connection Methods Built-in wireless connection 3 USB Connectors (2 USB 2.0 Connectors and 1 USB 3.0 Connector) 4 HDMI Connectors (2 HDMI 1.4 Connectors and 2 HDMI 2.0 Connectors) 1 LAN (Ethernet) port Easy Setup Menu and Simple Design Short and easy-to-follow first-time setup menu Simple user interface (UI) design to navigate the TV screens Descriptive features to help make your selections WELCOME TO THE HISENSE FAMILY!
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Hisense H9C Series 4K Ultra High-Definition Smart TV! This Quick Start Guide will walk you through a few easy steps to set up your TV. Because we value your business, we want to keep you in the know of 'all things Hisense'. Using your mobile phone, scan the Registration page QR code to register your TV. Depending on the make and model of your phone, you may need to download a QR code scanning app. Country U.S.A Hisense Support Page Customer Care Center REGISTER YOUR TV http://www.hisense-usa.com/
support/
http://www.hisense-
usa.com/support/
productReg.asp Phone: 1-888-935-8880 Hours of Operation:
Monday - Friday: 9 AM to 9 PM EST Saturday - Sunday: 9 AM to 6 PM EST Service Email: Service@hisense-usa.com CANADA MEXICO Phone: 1-855-344-7367 Hours of Operation:
Monday - Friday: 8 AM to 8 PM EST Service Email: canadasupport@hisense.com Phone: 01-800-008 8880 Hours of Operation:Monday - Friday 9:00-18:00 Service Email: servicio@hisense.com.mx http://www.hisense-canada. com/support/
http://www.hisense-
canada.com/support/
productReg.asp http://www.hisense.com.mx/
support/
http://www.hisense. com.mx/support/
productReg.asp Disclaimer: This Quick Start Guide is intended as a general guideline to help you set up your Hisense TV. Images throughout this document are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual product. 2 Packaged contents Your package in which you purchased your new TV contains the following items:
TV Quick Start Guide (this document) Power Cord 4 Support 16 screws (M3 8) Important Safety Information and Warranty Card Remote Control 1 set of AAA batteries IMPORTANT:
To prevent accidentally discarding items that came with your TV, be sure to check ALL of the foam in the carton box. Please check foam for accessories before discarding. Veuillez vrifier la mousse pour qu'il n'y ait pas d'accessoires avant de la jeter. Antes de desechar la espuma, asegrese de retirar todos los accesorios. Required tools and devices Wireless router (not included) for Internet connectivity Phillips screwdriver (not included) to secure the TV stand HDMI and other types of cables (not included) to connect external devices to the TV Wall mount bracket (not included) if you prefer to mount the TV to the wall 3 Buttons and Ports on the H9C Series 4K UHD Smart TV TV Side View Back View of the TV 1 B S U 2 B S U I E C V R E S
) z H 0 3
@
K 4
(
1 M D H I
) z H 0 3
@
K 4
(
2 M D H I 3 B S U Power Input TV Bottom View HDMI 3(4K@60Hz) HDMI 4(4K@60Hz) OK E L B A C T N A
/
) X A M A 5
(
. 0
) X A M A 5 0
(
.
) A m 0 0 9 V 5 C D
(
L H M C R A 4 STEP 1. Attach the Wall Mount Bracket(not included)
(Skip this step if you are using the TV stand.) Before you begin the third-party manufacturer instructions, be sure to do the following things:
Remove the TV Stand and install the Supports Follow the illustrations and instructions below to complete the installation steps:
1. Carefully place your TV facedown on a soft, surface to prevent the TV or scratching the screen. 2. Remove the TV base stand. 3. Take out the cover sheet on the wall mounting position of the TV set. screw base stand Cover sheet Cover sheet 4. Fasten the mounting support on the mounting position with the screws in the accessory bag. support NOTE Other mounting support and screws with different specifications may cause damage to TV. Product images are only for reference, actual product may vary in appearance. 5 5. Place the spacers (not included) in the corresponding bracket holes. 9.5 - 11.5 mm Wall mount bracket Support Bracket
(not provided) Rear cover of the TV Screw Spacer Wall mount hole pattern VESA (mm) 600 400 Wall mount screw size (mm) M6 Spacer
(not provided) CAUTION:
When you attach the mount, be sure to use the spacers
(provided by the third-party manufacturer) between the TV and the bracket. To prevent internal damage to the TV and ensure it is mounted securely, be sure to use fixing screws (not provided) that are 9.5 - 11.5 mm in length when measured from the attaching surface of the mounting hook. Follow instructions provided with the Wall mount bracket. To complete the installation, please contact the wall-mount manufacturer or the retailer from which you purchased the TV. The selected screws are 9.5 - 11.5 mm in length when measured from the attaching surface of the rear cover. The diameter and length of the screws differ depending on the Wall mount bracket model. NOTE: The diameter and length of the screws differ depending on the wall mount bracket model. 6 STEP 2. Connect devices to your TV Check to ensure that you have selected the right cables for the ports and that they are connected securely. Loose connections can affect the quality of the picture image and color. TV label Port Cable External Equipment Brief Description ANT/CABLE HDMI Y PB PR L R VIDEO L R COMPO-
NENT IN AV IN 7 VHF/UHF Antenna Antenna ANT OUT Connect an outdoor VHF/UHF antenna. This 4K TV has two different software versions of HDMI ports to connect HDMI-enabled devices. The two high-powered HDMI version 2.0(HDMI 3, HDMI 4) inputs enable you to connect 4K Ultra-HD external devices that require more bandwidth to transmit to the TV screen. For example, if you have an X-box or Blu-ray player that supports the 2.0 standard. The two HDMI version 1.4 inputs are great for any of your external devices that support a standard full high-definition resolution of 1080p. VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top Box Satellite antenna cable Connect a component video cable and left-right audio cables from an external AV device. Satellite Receiver Connect a composite video cable and left-right audio cables from an external AV device. Green Blue Red White Red Yellow White Red TV label Port Cable External Equipment Brief Description DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT USB LAN SERVICE Audio Amplifier Speaker Connect an optical cable from an external digital audio system. Connect headphones to hear audio from the TV. White Red Speaker Audio Amplifier Connect an audio adapter (not provided) from an external analog audio system. Connect a USB 3.0 device to transfer photos, music and movies to your TV at a rate that's 10 times faster than the USB 2.0 port NOTE: You can still plug a USB 2.0 device into a USB 3.0 port; however, the rate of speed will not be as fast. USB 3.0 devices are also back-
wards compatible with USB 2.0 ports. Connect an Ethernet cable to access a network or the Internet. The TV also has a wireless connectivity feature. LAN This port is not available for you to connect an external device. It can only be used by our factory for testing purposes. 8 Buttons on your TV remote Power on / off INPUT Change TV input source Infrared transmitter Enter Channels / input numbers Turn Closed Caption On/Off CC Quick Setup menu D-pad (up/down/left/right navigation buttons) OK Return to the previous place in the menu or app BACK EXIT Volume (up/down) VOL CH Media content control function buttons SLEEP APP APP APP APP Dash button Select a digital sub-channel Special function buttons All Apps Confirmation button Exit the application Display the Home screen Live TV Channel (up/down) Mute and restore sound Adjust Sleep timer setting Quick access buttons to apps 9 STEP 3. Begin using your remote 1. Slide the back cover to open the battery compartment of the remote control. Insert the batteries Gently push and slide Gently push and slide 2. Insert two AAA size batteries. Make sure to match the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries with the (+) and ( - ) ends indicated in the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery compartment cover. Important Information about the remote and batteries:
Discard batteries in a designated disposal area. Do not throw them into a fire. Remove old batteries immediately to prevent them from leaking into the battery compartment. If you do not intend to use the remote control for a long time, then remove the batteries. Battery chemicals can cause a rash. If the batteries leak, clean the battery compartment with a cloth. If chemicals touch your skin then wash it immediately. Do not mix old and new batteries. Do not mix alkaline, standard (carbon-zinc) or rechargeable
(NiCd, NiMH, etc.) batteries. Do not continue using the remote if it gets warm or hot. Call our Support Center immediately on the Hisense support website. Remote Control Range Information The remote control can work at a distance of up to 26 feet in front of the TV set. It can work at a 30 degree horizontal or vertical angle. Program Your Universal Cable or Satellite Remote Control to Operate Your New Hisense Television
(only for USA) If you would like to program your other household remote controls to your new Hisense television,please refer to the User's Manual supplied by your Cable or Satellite provider. The Cable or Satellite providers' User's Manuals should include instructions on how to program their remote to your television. A list of Hisense codes for the most common Cable and Satellite providers are listed below. Use the Hisense code that is associated with your Cable or Satellite provider (if applicable). DIRECTV......0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable......386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 Comcast......0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications......0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network......505, 627, 538, 720, 659 If the Hisense code associated with your Cable or Satellite provider is not listed, does not work or you cannot locate the instructions to program your remote, call your local Cable or 10 Satellite provider's customer service center. If your Cable or Satellite provider does not have a Hisense code available, please contact us at one of the phone numbers on Page 2. Using Your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote If you prefer to use your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote, then visit the Support page to view a list of the codes. STEP 4. Power on the TV Plug the power cord into a power outlet. Power Cord Wall Outlet 11 Press the Power button on the remote to turn on the TV. A splash screen that shows the Hisense logo appears. Next, the First-Time Setup Menu begins by prompting you to choose your Language, Country, and Time Zone. STEP 5. Complete the first-time setup menu After the splash screen that shows the Hisense logo appears, begin the first-time setup menu. Screen Language and Location TERMS OF SERVICE TV USAGE MODE Task Using the D-pad arrows of your remote, choose your Language, Country and Time Zone. Next, navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Press OK to select Accept All. When youre done navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Select Home (which appears by default). Next,navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Note: Store mode should only be selected by Retailers who plan to demonstrate the TV. NETWORK CONNECTION If your TV does not automatically detect an Ethernet connection, then select Wi-Fi. When youre done, select your network from the list that displays and move to the next screen. 12 Screen LIVE TV INPUT SOURCE Task Select how you receive your TV channels. Choose from one of the following sources below and then move to the next screen. TV AV COMPONENT HDMI TIP: You only need to scan for channels if your TV is connected to an Antenna. CONGRATULATIONS! Your TV is now ready to use. Press the OK confirmation button on your remote if you are fine with the selections that appear on the screen. Otherwise, navigate to the back arrow on the screen to change your selection. STEP 6. Begin to enjoy your TV Your Smart TV is easy to use and brag-worthy!
Now that youve completed the first-time setup menu, the Home screen is your starting point for navigating the TV. Gone are the days where your TV only provides one way for you to be entertained. This showpiece provides you the convenience of watching a program on a live channel, accessing Video on Demand to watch a movie and many other entertainment options. Using your remote, press the Home button to begin enjoying your TV. Disclaimer: Subscriptions or other payments may be required to access content through some applications. Some or all of the included or downloaded application services in this Hisense device may not function depending on the Internet connection, local limitations of included applications or other reasons outside of Hisenses control. HISENSE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY APPLICATION SERVICE FROM FUNCTIONING AT ANY TIME, FOR CONTENT IN ANY APPLICATION SERVICE, FOR DISRUPTIONS OF SERVICE, LOCAL OR REGIONAL LIMITATIONS, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NO INFRINGEMENT, AND FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. By purchasing this device, you accept such Disclaimer without any claim on Hisense at any time. 13 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Model Name Dimension
(W H D) Without Stand 75H9C+
66 37.9 2.2 inches
(1676 962 56 mm) 66 40.7 12.8 inches
(1676 1034 326 mm) 106.3 lbs (48.2 kg) 108.5 lbs (49.2 kg) 75 inches 3840 2160 15 W + 15 W 230 W 120 V ~ 60 Hz Weight With Stand Without Stand With Stand Active Screen Size (Diagonal) Screen Resolution Audio Power Power consumption Power Supply Performance and Compliance Certifications Picture Quality Audio technologies Connectivity Key Apps Ports Other features HDMI, VESA, Dolby Digital Plus, FCC, dbx-tv Total Technology HDR Processing, AquoMotion and Revelation Upscaler Supports dolby digital and dbx-tv Built-in Wireless feature (2x2 dual band) Netflix, Vudu, YouTube, Amazon Instant Video, Pandora and Opera App (Some apps only for USA) 4 HDMI ports, 3 USB ports, LAN port for Ethernet, 1 Digital Audio Output, 1 RF Input, 1 Earphone Audio Output, 1 RCA Composite Video Input , 1 left/right Audio Input for Composite, 1 RCA Component Video Input Smart TV, Dynamic contrast Picture, VESA standard wall mount support
''+'' would be replaced by any number, letter or blank. Disclaimer: All product, product specifications, and data are subject to change without notice to improve reliability, function, design or otherwise. 14 QUICK PROBLEM-SOLVING TIPS When you experience an issue with your TV, turn it off and on again. If this does not resolve the problem, then refer to the tips below. If the problem is still not resolved, then contact us at one of the phone numbers on Page 2. ISSUES POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Check if the power cord is plugged into a powered AC outlet. Press the Check to see if the LED light is on or not. If it is, then the TV is receiving power. Power button on the remote control to activate the unit from 'Standby' mode. No sound or picture I have connected an external source to my TV and I get no picture and/or sound. When I turn on my TV, there is a delay for a few seconds before the picture appears. Is this normal?
The picture is normal but there is no sound Sound but no picture or black and white picture The sound and/or picture is distorted or appears wavy The sound and picture is blurry or cuts out A horizontal or vertical stripe appears on the picture and/or the picture is shaking The plastic cabinet makes a
"clicking" type of sound The remote control does not work 15 Check for the correct output connection on the external source and for the correct input connection on the TV. Make sure you have made the correct selection for the input mode for the incoming signal. Yes, this is normal. The TV is initializing and searching for previous setting information. Check the volume settings. Check if 'Mute' mode is set to On. If the picture is black and white, unplug the TV from the AC outlet and replug it after 60 seconds. Check that the Color is set to 50 or higher. Try different TV channels. An electric appliance may be affecting the TV. Turn off any appliances that are nearby and move it farther away from the TV. Insert the power plug of the TV set into another power outlet. If using an external antenna, check the direction, position and connection of the antenna. Adjust the direction of your antenna or reset or fine tune the channel. Check if there is an appliance or electric tool nearby that is causing interference. The 'click' sound can occur when the temperature of the television changes. This change causes the television cabinet to expand or contract, which makes the sound. This is normal and the TV is OK. Confirm that TV still has power and is operational. Change the batteries in the remote control. Check if the batteries are correctly installed. Certification and Compliance FCC Notice This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the device and receiver. Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The Wi-Fi Module complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. This TV includes dbx-tv Technology. dbx-tv is a trademark or registered trademark of THAT Corporation. 2016. All rights reserved. Hisense and the Hisense logo are registered trademarks of Hisense. Other brand and product names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. 16
1 | User Manual 8 | Users Manual | 2.10 MiB |
ES-G155266-1 Model LC-75N8000U 4K Smart TV Quick Start Guide Help SHARP improve the environment by reducing paper waste. For detailed instructions and feature descriptions, access the full User Manual online. 2016 Hisense Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved. All material in this Quick Start Guide is the property of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries, and is protected under US and International copyright and/or other intellectual property laws. Reproduction or transmission of the materials, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic, print, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Hisense Company Ltd., is a violation of Hisense Company Ltd. rights under the aforementioned laws. No part of this publication may be stored, reproduced, transmitted or distributed, in whole or in part, in any manner, electronic or otherwise, whether or not for a charge or other or no consideration, without the prior written permission of Hisense Company Ltd. Requests for permission to store, reproduce, transmit or distribute materials may be made in writing to the following address:
USA: Hisense USA Corporation PO Box 3289 Suwanee, GA 30024 CANADA: Hisense Canada Co., Ltd, 405 Britannia Rd E., Suite 11 Mississauga, Ontario,L4Z 3E6 MEXICO: Hisense Mexico S de RL de CV Boulevard Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra No. 301, Torre Norte, Piso 2, Colonia Ampliacin Granada, C.P. 11520, en Mxico Distrito Federal. Sharp, Aquos, Quattron and any and all other Sharp product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks owned exclusively by Sharp Corporation.
"Hisense", and any and all other Hisense product names, logos, slogans or marks are registered trademarks and intellectual property rights of Hisense Company Ltd. and its subsidiaries. This product is sold to you under one or more license agreements between Sharp Corporation and Hisense International (Hong Kong) America Investment Co. Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. 4K Smart TV: An unforgettable entertainment experience Smart LED TV with Popular Features Ultra-fast access to launch Netflix Numerous built-in social media, gaming and movie apps Thousands of movie titles and streaming content to view 4K Media Player and Receiver App Store and Web Browser Many other cool features Multiple Connection Methods Built-in wireless connection 0.3 BSU 1 dna srotcennoC 0.2 BSU 2( srotcennoC BSU 3 Connector) 4 HDMI Connectors (2 HDMI 1.4 Connectors and 2 HDMI 2.0 Connectors) 1 LAN (Ethernet) port High-Quality Picture and Sound Vibrant contrast and brightness to display images accurately dbx-tv Award-winning sound 4K technology that supports 4K online streaming, 4K USB content, HDMI 2.0 devices and much more to maximize your entertainment experience AquoMotionTM 1 Easy Setup Menu and Simple Design Short and easy-to-follow first-time setup menu 75" class screen with a simple user interface (UI) design to navigate Descriptive features to help make your selections Register Your TV!
Congratulations on the purchase of your new SHARP 4K Smart TV! This Quick Start Guide will walk you through a few easy steps to set up your TV. For detailed instructions, access the User Manual on the support pages listed below. Because we value your business, we want to keep you in the know of 'all things SHARP'. Using your mobile phone, scan the Registration page QR code to register your TV. Depending on the make and model of your phone, you may need to download a QR code scanning app. Country U.S.A CANADA MEXICO Customer Care Center SHARP Support Page REGISTER YOUR TV Phone: 1-888-935-8880 Hours of Operation:
Monday - Friday: 9 AM to 9 PM EST Saturday - Sunday: 9 AM to 6 PM EST Service Email: support@sharptvusa.com Phone: 1-855-271-6271 Hours of Operation:
Monday - Friday: 8 AM to 8 PM EST Service Email: Canadasupport@sharp-canada.ca http:// www.sharptvusa.com
/support www.sharptvusa.com/
support/productreg.asp http://www.sharp-canada. ca/support/
No need to register Phone: 01-800-999-7277 Hours of Operation: Monday-Friday 09:00-18:00 Service Email: servicio@SHARPTV.com.mx http://www.SHARPTV.com. mx/support/
http://www.SHARPTV. com.mx/support/product Reg.asp Disclaimer: This Quick Start Guide is intended as a general guideline to help you set up your SHARP TV. Images throughout this document are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual product. 2 PACKAGED CONTENTS Your package in which you purchased your new TV contains the following items:
TV Power Cord 16 screws (M3 8) Remote Control Quick Start Guide (this document) 4 Support Important Safety Information and Warranty Card 1 set of AAA batteries IMPORTANT:
To prevent accidentally discarding items that came with your TV, be sure to check ALL of the foam in the carton box. Please check foam for accessories before discarding. Veuillez vrifier la mousse pour qu'il n'y ait pas d'accessoires avant de la jeter. Antes de desechar la espuma, asegrese de retirar todos los accesorios. Required tools and devices Wireless router (not included) for Internet connectivity Phillips screwdriver (not included) to secure the TV stand HDMI and other types of cables (not included) to connect external devices to the TV Wall mount bracket (not included) if you prefer to mount the TV to the wall 3 BUTTONS AND PORTS ON THE TV Back View of the TV TV Side View E L B A C T N A
/
) OK
) A m 0 0 9 V 5 C D L H M
(
C R A Power input TV Bottom View HDMI 3(4K@60Hz) LAN HDMI 4(4K@60Hz) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AV IN VIDEO L R Y PB PR COMPONENT IN 4 1 B S U 2 B S U X A M A 5
. 0
(
V 5 C D
) X A M A 5
(
. 0 V 5 C D I E C V R E S I O D U A T U O
) z H 0 3
@
K 4
(
1 I M D H
) z H 0 3
@
K 4
(
2 I M D H 3 B S U
) X A M A 1
(
V 5 C D STEP 1. Attach the TV Stand or Wall Mount Bracket Attach the TV Stand Follow the illustrations and instructions below to complete the installation steps:
1. Carefully place your TV facedown on a soft, flat surface to prevent damage to the TV or scratching to the screen. 2. Remove the TV base stand. base stand screw 3. Take out the cover sheet on the wall or ceiling mounting position of the TV set. Fasten the mounting support on the mounting position with the screws in the accessory bag. M3 8 support NOTES: Other mounting support and screws with different specifications may cause damage to TV. Product images are only for reference, actual product may vary in appearance. 5 Attach the Wall Mount Bracket (not included) Before you begin the third-party manufacturer instructions, be sure to do the following things:
1.Place the TV face down on a clean, safe and cushioned surface. 2.Remove the TV stand if you already attached it. 3.Place the spacers (not included) in the corresponding bracket holes. Bracket
(not provided) 9.5 - 11.5 mm Wall mount bracket Rear cover of the TV Screw Spacer Wall mount hole pattern VESA (mm) 600 400 Wall mount screw size (mm) M6 CAUTION:
When you attach the mount, be sure to use the spacers
(provided by the third-party manufacturer) between the TV and the bracket. To prevent internal damage to the TV and ensure it is mounted securely, be sure to use fixing screws (not provided) that are 9.5 - 11.5 mm in length when measured from the attaching surface of the mounting hook. Follow instructions provided with the Wall mount bracket. To complete the installation, please contact the wall-mount manufacturer or the retailer from which you purchased the TV. The selected screws are 9.5 - 11.5 mm in length when measured from the attaching surface of the rear cover. The diameter and length of the screws differ depending on the Wallmount bracket model. NOTE: The diameter and length of the screws differ depending on the wall mount bracket model. 6 STEP 2. Connect devices to your TV Check to ensure that you have selected the right cables for the ports and that they are connected securely. Loose connections can affect the quality of the picture image and color. TV label Port Cable External Equipment Brief Description ANT/CABLE HDMI COMPO-
NENT IN Y PB PR L R AV IN VIDEO L VHF/UHF Antenna Antenna ANT OUT Connect an outdoor VHF/UHF antenna. This 4K TV has two different software versions of HDMI ports to connect HDMI-enabled devices. The two high-powered HDMI version 2.0(HDMI 3, HDMI 4) inputs enable you to connect 4K Ultra-HD external devices that require more bandwidth to transmit to the TV screen. For example, if you have an X-box or Blu-ray player that supports the 2.0 standard. The two HDMI version 1.4 inputs are great for any of your external devices that support a Connect a component video cable and left-right audio cables from an external AV device. Connect a composite video cable and left-right audio cables from an external AV device. Green Blue Red White Red Yellow White VCR DVD Player/Recorder Video Camera Set-top Box Satellite antenna cable Satellite Receiver 7 TV label Port AV IN R Cable Red External Equipment Brief Description DIGITAL AUDIO OUT AUDIO OUT USB LAN SERVICE Connect an optical cable from an external digital audio system. Speaker Connect headphones to hear audio from the TV. White Red Speaker Connect an audio adapter (not provided) from an external analog audio system. Connect a USB 3.0 device to transfer photos, music and movies to your TV at a rate that's 10 times faster than the USB 2.0 port NOTE: You can still plug a USB 2.0 device into a USB 3.0 port; however, the rate of speed will not be as fast. USB 3.0 devices are also back-
wards compatible with USB 2.0 ports. Connect an Ethernet cable to access a network or the Internet. The TV also has a wireless connectivity feature. LAN This port is not available for you to connect an external device. It can only be used by our factory for testing purposes. 8 STEP 3. Establish a network connection 1.Press the 2.Select Network Network Configuration. button on the remote control and then press > to enter the Settings menu. TV JACK LAN IP Sharer (Router)
(with DHCP server) External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) LAN Cable LAN Cable Modem Cable Establish a wired network connection Automatically obtain an IP address 1.Select Ethernet. The TV will automatically obtain an IP address and connect to the network. NOTE: The default option of IP Setting Mode is DHCP. 2.If the connection fails then "Disconnected" will display for the Ethernet status. Retry or select Manual to input the information again. Manually enter the IP address 1.Select Manual. 2.Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Preferred DNS and Alternative DNS in the menu. Next, select Connect. 9 Establish a wireless network connection Wireless router with DHCP Wireless LAN Adapter built-in TV set LAN Cable The TV can directly receive network signals via wireless router 1.Select Wireless. The list of networks will be displayed in Available Networks automatically. 2.Select a wireless network from the list, input password and select Connect. 3.If the network connection does not appear in the list, select selection, select Add. to refresh the list or select + to manually enter SSID and Security mode Close the network connection Select Off. The network connection will close. 10 Buttons on your TV remote Power on / off INPUT Change TV input source Infrared transmitter Enter Channels / input numbers Turn Closed Caption On/Off CC The 'Gear' button for the Quick setup menu D-pad (up/down/left/right navigation buttons) OK Return to the previous place in the menu or app BACK EXIT Volume (up/down) VOL CH Media content control function buttons SLEEP APP APP APP APP 11 Dash button Select a digital sub-channel Special function buttons All Apps Confirmation button Exit the application Display the Home screen Live TV Channel (up/down) Mute and restore sound Adjust Sleep timer setting Quick access buttons to apps STEP 4. Begin using your remote 1. Slide the back cover to open the battery compartment of the remote control Gently push and slide Insert the batteries Gently push and slide 2. Insert two AAA size batteries. Make sure to match the (+) and (-) ends of the batteries with the (+) and ( - ) ends indicated in the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery compartment cover. Important Information about the remote and batteries:
Discard batteries in a designated disposal area. Do not throw them into a fire. Remove old batteries immediately to prevent them from leaking If you do not intend to use the remote control for a long time, into the battery compartment. then remove the batteries. Battery chemicals can cause a rash. If the batteries leak, clean the battery compartment with a cloth. If chemicals touch your skin then wash it immediately. Do not mix old and new batteries. Do not mix alkaline, standard (carbon-zinc) or rechargeable
(NiCd, NiMH, etc.) batteries. Do not continue using the remote if it gets warm or hot. Call our Support Center immediately on the SHARP support website. Remote Control Range Information The remote control can work at a distance of up to 26 feet in front of the TV set. It can work at a 30 degree horizontal or vertical angle. Program Your Universal Cable or Satellite Remote Control to Operate Your New SHARP Television (only for USA) If you would like to program your other household remote controls to your new SHARP television,please refer to the User Manual supplied by your Cable or Satellite provider. It should include instructions on how to program their remote to your television. A list of SHARP codes for the most common Cable and Satellite providers are listed below. Use the SHARP code that is associated with your Cable or Satellite provider (if applicable). DIRECTV......0178, 10178, 10019, 10748, 11314, 11660, 11710, 11780, 12049, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11564, 11641, 11963, 12002, 12183 Time Warner Cable......386, 0178, 10178, 400, 450, 461, 456, 0748, 1463, 0463, 10463 12 Comcast......0178, 10178, 10463, 11463, 10748, 11314, 11660, 10171, 11204, 11326, 11517, 11641, 11780, 11785, 11892, 11963, 12002 Cox Communications......0178, 10178, 1326, 1463 Dish Network......505, 627, 538, 720, 659 If the SHARP code associated with your Cable or Satellite provider is not listed, does not work or you cannot locate the instructions to program your remote, call your local Cable or Satellite provider's customer service center. If your Cable or Satellite provider does not have a SHARP code available, please contact us at one of the phone numbers on Page 2. Using Your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote If you prefer to use your Cable Set-top Box or Satellite Receiver Remote as a Universal Remote, then visit the Support page to view a list of the codes. STEP 5. Power on the TV Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. Power Cord Wall Outlet 13 Press the Power button on the remote to turn on the TV. A splash screen that shows the SHARP logo appears. Next, the First-Time Setup Menu begins by prompting you to choose your Language, Country, and Time Zone. STEP 6. Complete the first-time setup menu After the splash screen that shows the SHARP logo appears, begin the first-time setup menu. LANGUAGE AND LOCATION Language English Country United States
+
Time Zone Select
+
+
Language Terms Mode Network Input Done Task Using the D-pad arrows of your remote, choose your Language, Country and Time Zone. Next, navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Press OK to select Accept all. When youre done navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Select Home (which appears by default). Next,navigate to the Forward arrow and press OK. Note: Store mode should only be selected by Retailers who plan to demonstrate the TV. Screen LANGUAGE AND LOCATION TERMS OF SERVICE TV USAGE MODE NETWORK CONNECTION If your TV does not automatically detect an Ethernet connection, then select WiFi. When youre done, select your network from the list that displays and move to the next screen. 14 Screen LIVE TV INPUT SOURCE Task Select how you receive your TV channels. Choose from one of the following sources below and then move to the next screen. TV AV COMPONENT HDMI TIP: You only need to scan for channels if your TV is connected to an Antenna. CONGRATULATIONS! Your TV is now ready to use. Press the OK confirmation button on your remote if you are fine with the selections that appear on the screen. Otherwise, navigate to the back arrow on the screen to change your selection. STEP 7. Begin to enjoy your TV Your Smart TV is easy to use and brag-worthy!
Now that youve completed the first-time setup menu, the Home screen is your starting point for navigating the TV. Gone are the days where your TV only provides one way for you to be entertained. This showpiece provides you the convenience of watching a program on a live channel, accessing Video on Demand to watch a movie and many other entertainment options. Using your remote, press the Home button to begin enjoying your TV. Disclaimer: Subscriptions or other payments may be required to access content through some applications. Some or all of the included or downloaded application services in this Sharp, Aquos or Quattron device may not function depending on the Internet connection, local limitations of included applications or other reasons outside of the Licensor's or Manufacturers control. ALL LICENSORS AND THE MANUFACTURER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY APPLICATION SERVICE FROM FUNCTIONING AT ANY TIME, FOR CONTENT IN ANY APPLICATION SERVICE, FOR DISRUPTIONS OF SERVICE, LOCAL OR REGIONAL LIMITATIONS, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NO INFRINGEMENT, AND FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. By purchasing this device, you accept such Disclaimer without any claim on any Licensor and/or the Manufacturer at any time and in any territory. 15 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Disclaimer: All product, product specifications, and data are subject to change without notice to improve reliability, function, design or otherwise. Model Name Dimension
(W H D) Weight Without Stand With Stand Without Stand With Stand LC-75N8000U 66 37.9 2.2 inches
(1676 962 56 mm) 66 40.7 12.8 inches
(1676 1034 326 mm) 106.3 lbs (48.2 kg) 108.5 lbs (49.2 kg) 3840 2160 15 W + 15 W 230 W 120 V ~ 60 Hz Active Screen Size (Diagonal) 75 inches Screen Resolution Audio Power Power consumption Power Supply Performance and Compliance Certifications Picture Quality Audio technologies Connectivity Key Apps Ports Other features HDMI, VESA, Dolby Digital Plus, FCC, dbx-tv Total Technology HDR Processing, AquoMotion and Revelation Upscaler Supports dolby digital and dbx-tv Built-in Wireless feature (2x2 dual band) Netflix, Vudu, YouTube, Amazon Instant Video, Pandora and Opera App (Some apps only for USA) 4 HDMI ports, 3 USB ports, LAN port for Ethernet, 1 Digital Audio Output, 1 RF Input, 1 Earphone Audio Output, 1 RCA Composite Video Input , 1 left/right Audio Input for Composite, 1 RCA Component Video Input Smart TV, Dynamic contrast Picture, VESA standard wall mount support, Web browser, Parental Control and Closed Caption 16 QUICK PROBLEM-SOLVING TIPS When you experience an issue with your TV, turn it off and on again. If this does not resolve the problem, then refer to the tips below. If the problem is still not resolved, then contact us at one of the phone numbers on Page 2. ISSUES No sound or picture I have connected an external source to my TV and I get no picture and/or sound. When I turn on my TV, there is a delay for a few seconds before the picture appears. Is this normal?
The picture is normal but there is no sound Sound but no picture or black and white picture The sound and/or picture is distorted or appears wavy The sound and picture is blurry or cuts out A horizontal or vertical stripe appears on the picture and/or the picture is shaking POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS Check if the power cord is plugged into a powered AC outlet. Press the Check to see if the LED light is on or not. If it is, then the TV is receiving power. Power button on the remote control to activate the unit from 'Standby' mode. Check for the correct output connection on the external source and for the correct input connection on the TV. Make sure you have made the correct selection for the input mode for the incoming signal. Yes, this is normal. The TV is initializing and searching for previous setting information. Check the volume settings. Check if 'Mute' mode is set to On. If the picture is black and white, unplug the TV from the AC outlet and replug it after 60 seconds. Check that the Color is set to 50 or higher. Try different TV channels. An electric appliance may be affecting the TV. Turn off any appliances that are nearby and move it farther away from the TV. Insert the power plug of the TV set into another power outlet. If using an external antenna, check the direction, position and connection of the antenna. Adjust the direction of your antenna or reset or fine tune the channel. Check if there is an appliance or electric tool nearby that is causing interference. 17 The plastic cabinet makes a
"clicking" type of sound The 'click' sound can occur when the temperature of the television changes. This change causes the television cabinet to expand or contract, which makes the sound. This is normal and the TV is OK. The remote control does not work Confirm that TV still has power and is operational. Change the batteries in the remote control. Check if the batteries are correctly installed. Need more help?
Additional help is available online at support links on Page 2. You will find answers to frequently asked questions, downloadable firmware and more. 18 Certification and Compliance FCC Notice This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the device and receiver. Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for The Wi-Fi Module complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. This TV includes dbx-tv Technology. dbx-tv is a trademark or registered trademark of THAT Corporation. 2015. All rights reserved. SHARP and the SHARP logo are registered trademarks of SHARP. Other brand and product names are registered trademarks of their respective owners. help. NOTE: The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 19
1 | User Manual 9 | Users Manual | 2.19 MiB |
ES-G154912-2 1160102 Important Safety Information and Warranty Card Please read this thoroughly and keep it for future reference. IMPORTANT INFORMATION WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrow-head symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within a triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION:
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. INFORMATION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Wireless Radio For product available in the USA/Canada market, only channel 1~11 can be operated. Selection of other channels is not possible. The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for devices operating in the bands 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470-5600 MHz and 5650-
5725 MHz. This device and it's antennas(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. This device is restricted for indoor use. Important:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body. 1 Devices will not permit operations on channels 120-132 for 11a and 11n/a which overlap the 5600 - 5650 MHz band. Industry Canada Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with CAN ICES-003(B)/NMB-3(B). Wireless Radio For product available in the USA/Canada market, only channel 1~11 can be operated. Selection of other channels is not possible. The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for devices operating in the bands 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470-5600 MHz and 5650-
5725 MHz. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with IC multi-
transmitter product procedures. Referring to the multi-transmitter policy, multiple-transmitter(s) and module(s) can be operated simultaneously without reassessment permissive change. For indoor use only. Important: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate. Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installers attention to Article 820 of the National Electrical Code that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 2 DEAR SHARP CUSTOMER Thank you for your purchase of the Sharp Liquid Crystal Television. To ensure safety and many years of trouble-free operation of your product, please read the Important Safety Instructions carefully before using this product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Electricity is used to perform many useful functions, but it can also cause personal injuries and property damage if improperly handled. This product has been engineered and manufactured with the highest priority on safety. However, improper use can result in electric shock and/or fire. In order to prevent potential danger, please observe the following instructions when installing, operating and cleaning the product. To ensure your safety and prolong the service life of your Liquid Crystal Television, please read the following precautions carefully before using the product. 1. Read these instructions. 2. Keep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follow all instructions. 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. 6. Clean only with dry cloth. 7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12. Use only with cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Additional Safety Information 15. Power SourcesThis product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. 16. OverloadingDo not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. 17. Object and Liquid EntryNever push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. 18. Damage Requiring ServiceUnplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the AC cord or plug is damaged, b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water, d. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and 3 f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. 19. Replacement PartsWhen replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. 20. Safety CheckUpon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. 21. Wall or ceiling mountingWhen mounting the product on a wall or ceiling, be sure to install the product according to the method recommended by the manufacturer. ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70 Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna is connected to the television equipment, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-
in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Water and Moisture Do not use this product near water
- for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like. When using the TV outside, please make sure it is protected against moisture (rain, splashing water). Never expose to moisture. GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250) ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20) GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21) NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUND CLAMP Stand Do not place the product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod or table. Placing the product on an unstable base can cause the product to fall, resulting in serious personal injuries as well as damage to the product. Use only a cart, stand, tripod, bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product. When mounting the product on a wall, be sure to follow the manufacturers instructions. Use only the mounting hardware recommended by the manufacturer. Selecting the location Select a place with no direct sunlight and good ventilation. Ventilation The vents and other openings in the cabinet are designed for ventilation. Do not cover or block these vents and openings since insufficient ventilation can cause overheating and/or shorten the life of the product. Do not place the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface, since they can block ventilation openings. This product is not designed for built-in installation; do not place the product in an enclosed place such as a bookcase or rack, unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions are followed. The front panel used in this product is made of glass. Therefore, it can break when the product is dropped or applied with impact. Be careful not to be injured by broken glass pieces in case the panel breaks. Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products
(including amplifiers) that produce heat. The Liquid Crystal panel is a very high technology product with millions of pixels, giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few non-active pixels may appear on the screen as a fixed point of blue, green or red. Please note that this does not affect the performance of your product. Lightning For added protection for this television equipment during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna. This will prevent damage to the equipment due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. To prevent fire, never place any type of candle or flames on the top or near the TV set. To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not place the AC cord under the TV set or other heavy items. Do not display a still picture for a long time, as this could cause an afterimage to remain. To prevent fire or shock hazard, apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Do not insert foreign objects into the product. Inserting objects in the air vents or other openings may result in fire or electric shock. Exercise special caution when using the product around children. 4 Precautions when transporting the TV When transporting the TV, never carry it by holding or otherwise putting pressure onto the display. Be sure to always carry the TV by two people holding it with two hands. Caring for the cabinet Use a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.) and gently wipe the surface of the cabinet. Using a chemical cloth (wet/dry sheet type cloth, etc.) may deform the components of the main unit cabinet or cause cracking. Wiping with a hard cloth or using strong force may scratch the surface of the cabinet. If the cabinet is very dirty, wipe with a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.) soaked in neutral detergent diluted with water and thoroughly wrung out, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth. Avoid using benzene, thinner, and other solvents, as these may deform the cabinet and cause the paint to peel off. Do not apply insecticides or other volatile liquids. Also, do not allow the cabinet to remain in contact with rubber or vinyl products for a long period of time. Plasticizers inside the plastic may cause the cabinet to deform and cause the paint to peel off. Caring for the front panel Turn off the main power and unplug the AC cord from the wall outlet before handling. Gently wipe the surface of the front panel with a soft cloth (cotton, flannel, etc.). To protect the front panel, do not use a dirty cloth, liquid cleaners, or a chemical cloth (wet/dry sheet type cloth, etc.). This may damage the surface of the front panel. Wiping with a hard cloth or using strong force may scratch the surface of the front panel. Use a soft damp cloth to gently wipe the front panel when it is really dirty.(It may scratch the surface of the front panel when wiped strongly.) If the front panel is dusty, use an anti-static brush, which is commercially available, to clean it. To avoid scratching the frame or screen, please use a soft, lint free cloth for cleaning. Approved cleaning cloths are available directly from Sharp in single (00Z-LCD-CLOTH) or triple (00Z-LCD-CLOTH-3) packs. Call 1-800-BE-SHARP for ordering, or VISIT http://www.sharpusa.com/SharpDirect. Disconnect device Where the MAINS plug or an appliance coupler is used as the disconnect device, the disconnect device shall remain readily operable. WARNING Never place a television set in an unstable location. A television set may fall, causing serious personal injury or death. Many injuries, particularly to children, can be avoided by taking simple precautions such as:
Using cabinets or stands recommended by the manufacturer of the television set. Only using furniture that can safely support the television set. Ensuring the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture. Not placing the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support. Not placing the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the television set and supporting furniture. Educating children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its controls. If your existing television set is being retained and relocated, the same considerations as above should be applied. Buy and install low-cost anchoring devices to prevent TVs, dressers, bookcases or other furniture from tipping. 5 CHILD SAFETY:
PROPER TELEVISION PLACEMENT MATTERS THE CONSUMER ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY CARES Manufacturers, retailers and the rest of the consumer electronics industry are committed to making home entertainment safe and enjoyable. As you enjoy your television, please note that all televisions new and old- must be supported on proper stands or installed according to the manufacturers recommendations. Televisions that are inappropriately situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, speakers, chests, carts, etc., may fall over, resulting in injury. TUNE IN TO SAFETY ALWAYS follow the manufacturers recommendations for the safe installation of your television. ALWAYS read and follow all instructions for proper use of your television. NEVER allow children to climb on or play on the television or the furniture on which the television is placed. NEVER place the television on furniture that can easily be used as steps, such as a chest of drawers. ALWAYS install the television where it cannot be pushed, pulled over or knocked down. ALWAYS route cords and cables connected to the television so that they cannot be tripped over, pulled or grabbed. WALL OR CEILING MOUNT YOUR TELEVISION ALWAYS contact your retailer about professional installation if you have any doubts about your ability to safely mount your television. ALWAYS use a mount that has been recommended by the television manufacturer and has a safety certification by an independent laboratory (such as UL, CSA, ETL). ALWAYS follow all instructions supplied by the television and mount manufacturers. ALWAYS make sure that the wall or ceiling where you are mounting the television is appropriate. Some mounts are not designed to be mounted to walls and ceilings with steel studs or cinder block construction. If you are unsure, contact a professional installer. Televisions can be heavy. A minimum of two people is required for a wall or ceiling mount installation. MOVING AN OLDER TELEVISION TO A NEW PLACE IN YOUR HOME Many new television buyers move their older CRT televisions into a secondary room after the purchase of a flat-panel television. Special care should be made in the placement of older CRT televisions. ALWAYS place your older CRT television on furniture that is sturdy and appropriate for its size and weight. NEVER place your older CRT television on a dresser where children may be tempted to use the drawers to climb. ALWAYS make sure your older CRT television does not hang over the edge of your furniture. CE.org/safety 6 Information importante de scurit et Carte de Garantie Veuillez lire le prsent manuel compltement et le garder pour la rfrence future. INFORMATION IMPORTANTE AVERTISSEMENT POUR REDUIRE LE RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS EXPOSER LE PRODUIT A LA PLUIE OU A LHUMIDITE. ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC LECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION: AFIN DE RDUIRE LE RISQUE DE CHOC LECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (OU LE DOS). CET APPAREIL NE CONTIENT AUCUNE PICE RPARABLE PAR L'UTILISATEUR A LINTERIEUR. FAIRE APPEL UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFI. Le symbole dun clair dans un triangle quilatral a pour but davertir l'utilisateur de la prsence d'une tension dangereuse non isole lintrieur du botier du produit qui peut tre d'intensit suffisante pour constituer un risque de choc lectrique. Le point d'exclamation dans un triangle quilatral a pour but davertir l'utilisateur de la prsence des instructions d'utilisation et de maintenance (entretien) importantes dans la documentation qui accompagne l'appareil. ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER LE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, FAIRE CONCORDER LA LAME LARGE DE LA FICHE AVEC LA FENTE LARGE, INSERER COMPLETEMENT. AVERTISSEMENT:
Le rglement de la FCC stipule que toute modification non autorise de cet quipement non expressment approuvs par le fabricant pourrait annuler l'autorit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. ATTENTION:
Cet appareil rpond aux certifications FCC lorsque des cbles et des connecteurs blinds sont utiliss pour connecter l'appareil un autre appareil. Pour viter les interfrences lectromagntiques avec des appareils lectriques tels que les radios et les tlvisions, utiliser des cbles et des connecteurs blinds pour les connexions. INFORMATION:
Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limites pour un appareil numrique de classe B, conformment la section 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie de frquence radio. S'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux directives, il peut causer des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Il n'existe cependant aucune garantie que ces interfrences ne se produiront pas dans une installation particulire. Si cet quipement cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception radio ou tl, ce qui peut tre tabli en mettant l'quipement hors tension, on encourage l'utilisateur tenter de remdier au problme en prenant une ou plusieurs de ces mesures:
Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher l'appareil une prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter le revendeur ou un technicien qualifi en radio/tlvision. Radio sans fil Pour les produits disponibles sur le march amricain / canadien, seul les chanes 1 ~ 11 peuvent tre utilises. La slection des autres chanes est impossible. Le dispositif de l'opration dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv une utilisation intrieure afin de rduire les risques d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes de satellite mobile la co-chane. Slection Dynamique de Frquence (DFS) pour les dispositifs fonctionnant dans les bandes 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470-
5600 MHz et 5650-5725 MHz. Cet appareil ainsi que son antenne(s) ne doit pas tre co-situe ni fonctionn en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou metteur, sauf en conformit avec les procdures de produits multi-metteurs FCC. Cet appareil est restreint un usage intrieur. Important:
Les changements ou modifications non expressment approuvs par la partie responsable de la conformit pourraient annuler l'autorit de l'utilisateur utiliser l'quipement. FCC Dclaration dExposition aux Radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux FCC limites d'exposition aux radiations dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimale de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Les dispositifs ne permettront pas des oprations sur les chanes 120-132 pour 11a et 11n / a qui chevauchent la bande 5600 - 5650 MHz. 1 Dclaration de lIndustrie Canadienne Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme CAN ICES-003 (B) / NMB-3 (B) Radio sans fil Pour les produits disponibles sur le march amricain / canadien, seul les chanes 1 ~ 11 peuvent tre utilises. La slection des autres chanes est impossible. Le dispositif de l'opration dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv une utilisation intrieure afin de rduire les risques d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes de satellite mobile la co-chane. Slection Dynamique de Frquence (DFS) pour les dispositifs fonctionnant dans les bandes 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470-
5600 MHz et 5650-5725 MHz. Cet appareil ainsi que son antenne(s) ne doit pas tre co-situe avec une autre metteur, sauf en conformit avec les procdures de produits multi-metteurs IC. La rfrence la politique multi-metteur, au multi-metteur (s) et au module (s) peut tre faite simultanment sans changer la rvaluation permissive. Seulement pour une utilisation intrieure. Important: Les changements ou modifications non expressment approuvs par la partie responsable de la conformit pourraient annuler l'autorit de l'utilisateur utiliser l'quipement. IC Dclaration dExposition aux Radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites IC RSS-102 d'exposition aux radiations dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimale de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz doit tre tel que l'quipement est toujours conforme la limite e.i.r.p. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit tre tel que l'quipement satisfait encore aux limites e.i.r.p. spcifies pour lopration point--point et non point--point, le cas chant. Les utilisateurs devraient galement tre informs que les radars haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux (c.--utilisateurs prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient provoquer des interfrences et / ou endommager les appareils LE-LAN. Note pour l'installateur du systme CATV:
Ce rappel est destin attirer l'attention de l'installateur du systme CATV sur l'article 820 du Code national de l'lectricit qui fournit des lignes directrices pour la mise terre correcte et, en particulier, spcifie que la terre du cble doit tre connect au systme de terre du btiment, le plus prs du point d'entre du cble possible. 2 CHERS CLIENTS DE SHARP Nous vous remercions de votre achat du Tlviseur Cristaux Liquides de Sharp. Pour assurer la scurit et de fonctionnement sans problme de votre produitde nombreuses annes, veuillez lire les Notices Importantes de Scurit avant d'utiliser ce produit. NOTICES IMPORTANTES DE SCURIT L'lectricit est utilise pour effectuer de nombreuses fonctions utiles, mais il peut aussi causer des blessures et des dommages la proprit si elle est mal gre. Ce produit a t conu et fabriqu avec la plus haute priorit la scurit. Cependant, une mauvaise utilisation peut entraner un choc lectrique et / ou un incendie. Afin d'viter tout danger potentiel, veuillez respecter les consignes suivantes lors de l'installation, de l'exploitation et du nettoyage du produit. Pour assurer votre scurit et prolonger la dure de vie de votre Tlviseur Cristaux Liquide, veuillez lire attentivement les prcautions suivantes avant d'utiliser le produit. 1. Lisez ces instructions. 2. Conservez ces instructions. 3. Respectez tous les avertissements. 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. 5. N'utilisez pas cet appareil proximit de l'eau. 6. Ne le nettoyez qu'avec un linge sec. 7. Ne bloquez aucune des ouvertures daration. Effectuez l'installation conformment aux instructions du fabricant. 8. Ne l'installez pas prs de sources de chaleur comme les radiateurs, les corps de chauffe, les fourneaux ou dautres dispositifs (y compris les amplificateurs) produisant de la chaleur. 9. Ne retirez pas le dispositif de scurit de la fiche polarise ou la fiche de terre. Une fiche polarise comporte deux lames dont lune est plus large que l'autre. Une fiche de type terre comporte deux lames et une troisime broche de mise la terre. La lame large et la troisime broche de mise la terre sont fournies pour votre scurit. Si la fiche fournie ne convient pas la prise de courant, consultez un lectricien pour remplacer la prise de courant obsolte. 10. Placez le cordon d'alimentation de faon qu'il ne soit pas ni pitin ni pinc, en particulier au niveau de la fiche, des prises de courant et du point de sortie de l'appareil. 11. N'utilisez que des priphriques / accessoires spcifis par le fabricant. 12. Ne l'utilisez qu'avec un chariot, un trpied, un support ou une table spcifi par le fabricant ou vendu avec l'appareil. Si vous utilisez un chariot, faites attention lors du dplacement de lensemble chariot / appareil afin d'viter toute blessure en cas de renversement. 13. Dbranchez l'appareil lors en cas dorages ou quand il ne sera pas utilis pendant longtemps. 14. Confiez toute rparation au personnel qualifi. Des rparations sont ncessaires si l'appareil est endommag d'une faon quelconque, tels que le cordon d'alimentation ou fiche est endommag, que du liquide a t renvers, que les objets sont tombs sur l'appareil, que lappareil a t expos la pluie ou l'humidit et que lappareil ne marche pas normalement ou que lon a fait tomber. Informations de scurit supplmentaires 15. Sources dAlimentation Cet appareil doit tre aliment seulement partir du type de source d'alimentation indiqu sur l'tiquette. Si vous n'tes pas sr du type d'alimentation lectrique de votre domicile, consultez votre revendeur ou la compagnie d'lectricit locale. Pour les produits destins tre opr partir de la batterie, ou d'autres sources, reportez-vous aux instructions d'utilisation. 16. Surcharge Ne par surcharger les prises murales, les rallonges ou les prises de courant intgrales car cela peut entraner un risque d'incendie ou un choc lectrique. 17. Entre dObjets et Liquides Ne jamais pousser des objets de toute sorte dans ce produit travers les ouvertures, ils pourraient toucher des points de tension dangereux ou provoquer des courts-circuits et puis un incendie ou un choc lectrique. Ne jamais renverser de liquide d'aucune sorte sur le produit. 18. Dommages Ncessitant Rparation Dbrancher l'appareil de la prise murale et faire appel un personnel qualifi dans les cas suivants:
a. Lorsque le cordon d'alimentation ou la prise est endommag, b. Si du liquide des objets sont tombs dans le produit, c. Si le produit a t expos la pluie ou l'eau, d. Si le produit ne fonctionne pas normalement en suivant les instructions de fonctionnement. Rgler seulement les contrles couverts par les instructions de fonctionnement car un mauvais rglage d'autres commandes peut entraner des dommages et ncessitera souvent un travail approfondi par un technicien qualifi pour restaurer le produit son fonctionnement normal, e. Si le produit a t chapp ou endommag de quelque faon, et f. Lorsque le produit montre un changement notable de performance - ce qui indique un besoin de rparation. 19. Pices de rechange Lorsque une pice de rechange est ncessaire, assurez-vous que le technicien a utilis les pices spcifies par le fabricant ou ayant les mmes caractristiques que la pice originale. Des substitutions non 3 autorises peuvent provoquer un incendie, un choc lectrique ou dautres dangers. 20. Vrification de Scurit la fin de tout service ou de rparation de ce produit, demander au technicien de service deffectuer des contrles de scurit pour dterminer que le produit est en bon tat de fonctionnement. 21. Montage au mur ou au plafond Lors du montage de lappareil au mur ou au plafond, veillez installer le produit NATIONAL DE L'LECTRICIT ANSI / NFPA 70 EXEMPLE DE TERRE ANTENNE SELON LE CODE selon la mthode recommande par le fabricant. Antenne Extrieure a la Terre Si une antenne extrieure est branche l'appareil de tlvision, assurez-vous que le systme dantenne est mis la terre afin de protger contre la surtension ou les dcharges lectrostatiques. Larticle 810 du Code National de l'Electricit, ANSI/NFPA 70, renseigne sur la mise la terre approprie du mat et de la structure de soutien, la mise la terre du fil conducteur une unit de dcharge d'antenne, la taille des conducteurs de terre, l'emplacement de l'unit de dcharge d'antenne, la connexion aux lectrodes de terre et les exigences concernant l'lectrode de terre. Eau et humidit - Ne pas utiliser ce produit prs de l'eau
- par exemple, prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou un lavoir; dans un sous-sol humide; ou prs d'une piscine; etc.. Lors de lutilisation du tlviseur l'extrieur, assurez-vous quil est protg contre lhumidit (pluie, projections deau). Ne jamais lexposer lhumidit. EQUIPEMENT DE SERVICE ELECTRIQUE COLLIERS DE MISE LA TERRE FIL D'ANTENNE ENTRANT NEC CODE NATIONAL DE L'LECTRICIT COLLIERS DE MISE LA TERRE SYSTME DLECTRODE DE MISE LA TERRE DU SECTEUR (CNE ART. 250) UNIT DE DCHARGE DANTENNE (NEC SECTION 810-20) CONDUCTEURS DE TERRE (NEC SECTION 810-21) Stand - Ne pas placer le produit sur un chariot, un support, un trpied ou une table. Placer le produit sur une base instable peut provoquer la chute du produit, entranant des blessures graves ainsi que des dommages au produit. Utiliser uniquement un chariot, un trpied, un support ou une table recommand par le fabricant ou vendu avec le produit. Lors du montage de lappareil sur un mur, assurez-vous de suivre les instructions du fabricant. Utiliser uniquement le matriel de montage recommand par le fabricant. Slection de lemplacement - Slectionner un endroit sans lumire directe du soleil et avec une bonne ventilation. Ventilation Les ouvertures de vent ou quelconques du botier sont destines la ventilation. Ne pas couvrir ou bloquer ces ouvertures car une ventilation insuffisante peut provoquer la surchauffe et / ou le raccourcissement de la dure de vie du produit. Ne pas placer le produit sur un lit, un canap, un tapis ou autre surface similaire, car ils peuvent bloquer les ouvertures de ventilation. Ce produit nest pas conu pour une installation intgre; ne pas placer le produit dans un endroit clos comme une bibliothque ou une tagre, sauf si une ventilation adquate est prvue ou si les instructions du fabricant sont suivies. Le panneau avant de ce produit est fait de verre. Par consquent, il peut se briser si le produit tombe ou subit un choc. Veiller ne pas tre bless par les dbris de verre cass en cas de rupture du panneau. Chaleur - Le produit doit tre plac loin des sources de chaleur telles que des radiateurs, registres de chaleur, poles ou autres produits (y compris les amplificateurs) qui produisent de la chaleur. Le Panneau Cristaux Liquides est un produit de trs haute technologie avec des millions de pixels, vous offrant des dtails fins de limage. Parfois, Il apparat quelques pixels non actifs sur lcran comme un point fixe bleu, vert ou rouge. Il est noter que cela ne modifie pas les performances de votre produit. Foudre - Pour une protection supplmentaire pour ce tlviseur pendant un orage, ou quand il est laiss sans surveillance et inutilis pendant de longues priodes de temps, dbranchez-le de la prise murale et dconnectez lantenne. Cela permettra dviter les dommages lquipement dus la foudre et les surtensions. Cordons dalimentation -Une antenne extrieure ne devrait pas tre situe proximit des cordons dalimenation, dun clairage lectrique ou dautres circuits lectriques, ni l o elle pourrait scraser contre des lignes ou circuits lectriques. Lors de linstallation dune antenne extrieure, il faut prendre les mesures ncessaires pour viter de toucher les lignes ou circuits lectriques car un tel contact serait mortel. Pour viter tout incendie, ne jamais place de bougie ou autres flammes au-dessus ou prs du tlviseur. Pour empcher le risque dincendie ou dlectrocution, ne pas place le cordon dalimentation sous lensemble du tlviseur ou autres objets lourds. Ne pas afficher une image fixe pendant une longue priode, car cela provoquerait une image rmanente. Pour viter un incendie ou un choc lectrique, lappareil ne doit pas tre expos des claboussures, et lobjet rempli de liquides, comme des vases, ne doit tre plac sur l'appareil. Ne pas insrer d'objets trangers dans le produit. Linsertion d'objets dans les orifices d'aration ou d'autres ouvertures provoquerait un incendie ou un choc lectrique. Faire particulirement attention lors de l'utilisation du produit autour des enfants. 4 Prcautions lors du transport du tlviseur Lors du transport du tlviseur, ne pas le transporter en tenant ou en faisant pression l'cran. Veiller le transporter toujours par deux personnes tenant deux mains. Entretien du botier Utiliser un chiffon doux (coton, flanelle, etc.) et essuyer dlicatement la surface du botier. Un chiffon chimique (un chiffon sec / humide de type feuille, etc.) peut dformer les composants du botier principal de l'appareil ou provoquer des fissures. Un chiffon rche ou un nettoyage avec force risque de rayer la surface du botier. Si le botier est trs sale, essuyer avec un chiffon doux (coton, flanelle, etc.) imbib de dtergent neutre dilu avec de l'eau et bien essor, puis essuyer avec un chiffon doux et sec. viter d'utiliser un benzne, un solvant volatil et d'autres solvants, car ils peuvent dformer le botier et provoquer le dcollement de la peinture. Ne pas appliquer des insecticides ou d'autres liquides volatils. Aussi, ne pas laisser le botier rester en contact avec les produits en caoutchouc ou en vinyle pendant une longue priode de temps. Les plastifiants lintrieur du plastique pourraient causer des dformations du botier et provoquer le dcollement de la peinture. Entretien du panneau frontal Couper l'alimentation principale et dbrancher le cordon secteur de la prise murale avant la manipulation. Essuyer doucement la surface du panneau frontal avec un chiffon doux (coton, flanelle, etc.). Pour protger le panneau frontal, ne pas utiliser de chiffon sale, de nettoyants liquides ni de chiffon chimique (feuille de tissu humide / sec, etc.
). Cela pourrait endommager la surface du panneau frontal. Un chiffon rche ou un nettoyage avec force risque de rayer la surface du panneau frontal. Utilisez un chiffon doux et humide pour essuyer dlicatement le panneau frontal quand il est vraiment sal. (Lessuyage fort peut rayer la surface du panneau frontal.) Si le panneau frontal est poussireux, utiliser une brosse anti-statique, qui est disponible dans le commerce, pour le nettoyer. Pour viter de rayer le cadre ou l'cran, utiliser un chiffon doux non pelucheux, pour le nettoyage. Les chiffons de nettoyage approuvs sont disponibles directement partir de Sharp au package seul (00Z-LCD-CLOTH) ou triple
(00Z-LCD-CLOTH-3). Appeler 1-800-BE-SHARP pour commander ou visiter http://www.sharpusa.com/SharpDirect. Dispositif de dconnexion Si la prise SECTEUR ou un coupleur d'appareil est utilis comme dispositif de dconnexion, ce dernier doit rester facilement accessible. AVERTISSEMENT Ne placez jamais le tlviseur sur un support instable. Un tlviseur pourrait tomber, causant des blessures graves ou la mort. Certaines blessures, notamment chez les enfants, peuvent tre vites en prenant des prcautions simples tels que :
Utiliser des armoires ou supports recommands par le fabricant du tlviseur. Utiliser des meubles capables de supporter le tlviseur. Positionner le tlviseur de manire quil ne soit pas au bord du meuble. viter de placer le tlviseur sur un grand meuble (par exemple, les armoires ou les bibliothques) sans accrocher la fois le meuble et le tlviseur un support appropri. viter de placer des tissus ou autres matriaux entre le tlviseur et le meuble sur lequel il est pos. duquer les enfants sur les dangers de grimper sur un meuble pour atteindre le tlviseur ou ses contrles. Si vous conservez votre ancien tlviseur et que celui-ci est dplac, les considrations numres ci-dessus doivent galement tre appliques. Achetez et installez des dispositifs daccrochage pour empcher les tlviseurs, les commodes, les bibliothques ou autres meubles de basculer. 5 SCURIT DES ENFANTS:
QUESTIONS SUR LE PLACEMENT APPROPRIE DE TELEVISION SOUCIE DE LINDUSTRIE DE LELECTRONIQUE DE CONSOMMATION Les fabricants, les dtaillants et le reste de l'industrie de l'lectronique de consommation se sont engags rendre le cinma maison agrable et scuritaire. Comme vous profitez de votre tlviseur, il est noter que tous les tlviseurs - nouveau et ancien - doivent tre appuye sur des supports adapts ou installs conformment aux recommandations du fabricant. Les tlvisions qui sont inappropries sur des commodes, des bibliothques, des tagres, des bureaux, des haut-parleurs, des coffres, des chariots, etc. pourraient tomber, entranant des blessures. votre tlviseur. tlviseur. une commode. COUTER DE LA SCURIT TOUJOURS suivre les recommandations du fabricant pour l'installation scuritaire de TOUJOURS lire et suivre toutes les instructions pour une bonne utilisation de votre JAMAIS permettre aux enfants de grimper ni de jouer sur la tlvision ou sur les meubles sur lesquels est plac le tlviseur. JAMAIS placer le tlviseur sur un meuble qui peut facilement servir d'escalier, comme TOUJOURS installer le tlviseur l o il ne peut pas tre pouss, tir ou renvers. TOUJOURS aligner les cordons et les cbles connects au tlviseur afin qu'ils ne puissent pas faire trbucher, tre tir ni accroch. FIXER VOTRE TELEVISEUR AU MUR OU AU PLAFOND TOUJOURS contacter votre dtaillant sur l'installation professionnelle si vous avez des doutes sur votre capacit de monter en toute scurit votre tlviseur. TOUJOURS utiliser une monture recommande par le fabricant de la tlvision et qui a une certification de scurit par un laboratoire indpendant (comme UL, CSA, ETL). TOUJOURS suivre toutes les instructions fournies par la tlvision et les fabricants de monture. TOUJOURS Veiller ce que le mur ou le plafond auquel vous montez le tlviseur soit appropri. Des montures ne sont pas conues pour tre monts au mur et plafond avec des poteaux d'acier ou la construction de bloc de ciment. Si vous n'tes pas sr, contactez un installateur professionnel. Les Tlviseurs peuvent tre lourds. Au moins deux personnes sont ncessaires pour linstallation au mur ou au plafond. DEPLACEMENT D'UN VIEUX TELEVISEUR A UNE NOUVELLE PLACEA VOTRE DOMICILE Beaucoup de nouveaux acheteurs de tlvision dplacent leurs tlviseurs gs CRT dans une pice secondaire aprs l'achat d'un tlviseur cran plat. Une attention particulire doit tre faite dans le placement des anciens tlviseurs CRT. TOUJOURS placer votre vieux tlviseur CRT sur des meubles qui est robuste et approprie pour sa taille et son poids. JAMAIS placer votre vieux tlviseur CRT sur une commode o les enfants peuvent TOUJOURS veiller ce que votre vieux tlviseur CRT ne soit pas renvers sur le bord utiliser les tiroirs pour grimper. de votre meuble. CE.org/safety 6 Informacin Importante De Seguridad y Tarjeta De Garanta Por favor lalo cuidadosamente y gurdelo para futuras referencias. INFORMACIN IMPORTANTE ADVERTENCIA:
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O DESCARGA ELCTRICA, NO EXPONGA ESTE PRODUCTO A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD. PRECAUCIN RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELCTRICA NO ABRIR PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA E L C T R I C A , N O R E T I R E L A C U B I E R TA
(DELANTERA O TRASERA). NO HAY PIEZAS EN EL INTERIOR QUE EL USUARIO PUEDA REPARAR. SI NECESITA SERVICIO COMUNIQUESE CON PERSONAL CUALIFICADO. El smbolo con un rayo dentro de un tringulo equiltero pretende alertar al usuario de la presencia de voltaje peligroso sin aislar dentro del gabinete del producto que puede ser de magnitud suficiente para constituir un riesgo de descarga elctrica. El signo de exclamacin dentro de un tringulo pretende alertar al usuario de la presencia de instrucciones importantes de uso y mantenimiento (servicio) en la literatura que acompaa al producto. PRECAUCIN:
PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELCTRICAS, INSERTE COMPLETAMENTELA LA HOJA ANCHA DEL ENCHUFE EN LA RANURA ANCHA. ADVERTENCIA:
Regulaciones de la FCC estipulan que cualquier cambio o modificacin no autorizada a este equipo sin la aprobacin expresa por el fabricante pueden anular la autorizacin del usuario para utilizar este equipo. PRECAUCIN:
Este producto cumple con las regulaciones de la FCC si se utilizan cables y conectores blindados para conectar la unidad a otro equipo. Para evitar interferencias electromagnticas con aparatos elctricos, como radios y televisores, utilice conectores y cables blindados para las conexiones. INFORMACIN:
Este equipo ha sido sometido a pruebas y cumple con los lmites para un dispositivo digital de clase B, de conformidad con la parte15 de las Normas de la FCC. Estos lmites estn diseados para proporcionar una proteccin razonable contra interferencias perjudiciales en una instalacin residencial. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede irradiar energa de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza de acuerdo con las instrucciones, puede causar interferencias en las comunicaciones de radio. Sin embargo, no hay garanta de que no se produzcan interferencias en una instalacin particular. Si este equipo causa interferencias perjudiciales para recepcin de radio o televisin, lo cual puede ser determinado apagando y prendiendo el equipo, se recomienda al usuario que intente corregir la interferencia mediante una o ms de las siguientes medidas:
Reoriente o reubique la antena receptora. Aumente la distancia que separa el equipo y el receptor. Conecte el equipo a un tomacorriente en un circuito diferente al que est conectado el receptor. Consulte al distribuidor o a un tcnico de radio / television para obtener asitencia. Radio inalmbrico Para el producto disponible en el mercado de EE.UU. / Canad, puede ser operado nicamente los canales 1 ~ 11 . La seleccin de los otros canales no es posible. El dispositivo para la operacin en la banda 5150-5250 MHz es slo para uso en interiores para reducir las posibles interferencias perjudiciales para la co-canal sistemas mviles por satlite. Seleccin de Frecuencia Dinmica (DFS) para dispositivos que operan en las bandas 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470 hasta 5600 MHz y 5650 a 5725 MHz. Este dispositivo y sus antenas (s) no deben colocarse ni funcionar junto con otra antena o transmisor excepto de conformidad con los procedimientos de productos multi-transmisor de la FCC. Este dispositivo est restringido para su uso en interiores. Importante:
Cualquier cambio o modificacin no aprobados expresamente por la parte responsable para el cumplimiento podran anular la autoridad del usuario para operar el equipo. Declaracin de Exposicin a la Radiacin de la FCC:
Este equipo cumple los lmites FCC de exposicin a la radiacin establecida para un ambiente no controlado. Este dispositivo debera estar instalado y operarse con una distancia mnima de 20 centmetros entre el radiador y su cuerpo. Los dispositivos no permitirn las operaciones en los canales 120-132 para 11a y 11n / a que se solapan la banda 5600
- 5650 MHz. 1 Declaracin de Industria Canad Este aparato digital de Clase B cumple con la CAN ICES-003 (B) / NMB-3 (B) Radio inalmbrico Para el producto disponible en el mercado de EE.UU. / Canad, puede ser operado nicamente los canales 1 ~ 11 . La seleccin de los otros canales no es posible. El dispositivo para la operacin en la banda 5150-5250 MHz es slo para uso en interiores para reducir las posibles interferencias perjudiciales para la co-canal sistemas mviles por satlite. Seleccin de Frecuencia Dinmica (DFS) para dispositivos que operan en las bandas 5250- 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5600 MHz y 5650 - 5725 MHz. Este dispositivo y sus antenas (s) no deben colocarse junto con otro transmisor excepto de conformidad con los procedimientos de productos multi-transmisor de la IC. En referencia a la poltica multi-transmisor, mltiples transmisores y los mdulos pueden funcionar simultneamente sin reevaluacin de cambio permisivo. Slo para uso en interiores. Importante: Cualquier cambio o modificacin no aprobados expresamente por la parte responsable para el cumplimiento podran anular la autoridad del usuario para operar el equipo. Declaracin de Exposicin a la Radiacin de la IC:
Este equipo cumple con los lmites IC RSS-102 de exposicin a la radiacin establecida para un ambiente no controlado. Este dispositivo debera estar instalado y operarse con una distancia mnima de 20 centmetros entre el radiador y su cuerpo. La ganancia de antena mxima permitida para los dispositivos en las bandas 5250-5350 MHz y 5470-5725 MHz ser tal que el equipo sigue cumpliendo con el lmite de e.i.r.p. La ganancia de antena mxima permitida para los dispositivos en la banda 5725-5850 MHz ser tal que el equipo sigue cumpliendo con el lmite e.i.r.p. especificado para punto a punto y operacin de la no-punto a punto, segn sea apropiado. Los usuarios tambin deben ser advertidos de que los radares de alta potencia estn asignados como usuarios primarios (es decir, los usuarios de prioridad) de las bandas 5250-5350 MHz y 5650-5850 MHz y que estos radares pueden provocar interferencias y / o daar los dispositivos LE-LAN. Nota para el instalador del sistema CATV:
Esta nota tiene el propsito de llamar la atencin para los instaladores de sistemas de CATV con el artculo 820 del Cdigo Elctrico Nacional que proporciona directrices para puesta a tierra y, en particular, especifica que el cable a tierra debe conectarse al sistema a tierra del edificio, tan cerca del punto de entrada del cable. 2 ESTIMADO CLIENTE DE SHARP Gracias por su compra del Televisor SHARP de cristal lquido. Para garantizar la seguridad y muchos aos de funcionamiento sin problemas de su producto, por favor, lea las Instrucciones importantes de seguridad antes de utilizar este producto. IMPORTANTES INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD La electricidad se usa para realizar muchas funciones tiles, pero tambin puede causar lesiones personales y daos a la propiedad si se maneja de manera inadecuada. Este producto ha sido diseado y fabricado con la ms alta prioridad en la seguridad. Sin embargo, el uso inadecuado puede provocar una descarga elctrica y / o incendio. Con el fin de evitar un peligro potencial, tenga en cuenta las siguientes instrucciones al instalar, operar y limpiar el producto. Para garantizar su seguridad y prolongar la vida til de su televisor de cristal lquido, por favor, lea las siguientes precauciones antes de utilizar el producto. 1. Lea las instrucciones. 2. Guarde estas instrucciones. 3. Respete todas las advertencias. 4. Siga todas las instrucciones. 5. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. 6. Solo lmpielo con pao seco. 7. No obstruya las rejillas de ventilacin. Instale de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. 8. No lo instale cerca de fuentes de calor tales como radiadores, calefactores, estufas u otros aparatos (incluyendo amplificadores) que produzcan calor. 9. No anule el propsito de seguridad del enchufe polarizado o con toma de tierra. Un enchufe polarizado tiene dos clavijas, una ms ancha que la otra. Una toma de tierra tiene dos clavijas y una tercera clavija de tierra. La hoja ancha o la tercera clavija se proporciona para su seguridad. Si el enchufe no encaja en su tomacorriente, consulte a un electricista para reemplazar la toma obsoleta. 10. Proteja el cable de alimentacin de ser pisado o pellizcado en particular en los enchufes, tomacorrientes y el punto donde salen del aparato. 11. Use nicamente los dispositivos / accesorios especificados por el fabricante. 12. Use nicamente la carretilla, plataforma, trpode, soporte o mesa especificados por el fabricante, o vendidos con el aparato. Cuando se usa un carro, tenga cuidado al mover la combinacin carro / aparato para evitar daos por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe este aparato durante tormentas elctricas o cuando no se utilize por largos perodos de tiempo. 14. Solicite el servicio de personal cualificado. Se requiere servicio cuando el aparato ha sido daado de alguna forma, si el cable de alimentacin o el enchufe est daado, se ha derramado lquido o han cado objetos dentro del aparato, el aparato ha sido expuesto a lluvia o humedad, no funciona con normalidad, o se ha cado. Informacin de seguridad adicional 15. Fuentes de alimentacin -Este producto deber utilizarse solamente con el tipo de corriente indicado en la etiqueta. Si no est seguro del tipo de suministro elctrico de su casa, consulte al distribuidor del producto o a la compaa elctrica local. Para aquellos productos que funcionan con bateras, u otras fuentes, consulte las instrucciones de funcionamiento. 16. Sobrecarga-No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, cables de extensin o receptculos integrales ya que esto puede resultar en un riesgo de incendio o descarga elctrica. 17. Entrada de objetos y lquidos-Nunca introduzca objetos de ningn tipo en este producto a travs de las aberturas, ya que podran tocar puntos de tensin peligrosos o cortocircuitar piezas que podran resultar en un incendio o una descarga elctrica. Nunca derrame lquido de ningn tipo sobre el producto. 18. Daos que requieren reparacin-Desenchufe este producto de la toma de corriente y solicite el servicio a personal de servicio calificado bajo las siguientes condiciones:
a. Cuando el cable de CA o el enchufe estn daados, b. Si se ha derramado lquido o han cado objetos dentro del producto, c. Si el producto ha quedado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua, d. Si el producto no funciona normalmente siguiendo las instrucciones de funcionamiento. Ajuste slo los controles que estn cubiertos por las instrucciones de funcionamiento ya que un ajuste incorrecto de otros controles puede resultar en daos, y podra requerir la intervencin de un tcnico cualificado para restaurar el producto a su funcionamiento normal, e. Si el producto se ha cado o daado de alguna manera, y f. Cuando el producto muestra un cambio notable en su rendimiento - esto indica la necesidad de servicio. 19. Piezas de repuesto-Cuando se necesiten repuestos, asegrese de que el tcnico utilice las piezas especificadas por el fabricante o que tengan las mismas caractersticas como la pieza original. Las sustituciones no autorizadas 3 pueden ocasionar incendios, descargas elctricas u otros peligros. 20. Revisin de seguridad-Al finalizar cualquier servicio o reparacin de este producto, pida al tcnico que realice comprobaciones de seguridad para determinar que el producto se encuentra en buenas condiciones de funcionamiento. 21. Montaje en pared o techo-Al montar el producto en una pared o en el techo, asegrese de instalar el producto de acuerdo con el mtodo recomendado por el fabricante. ELCTRICO NACIONAL, ANSI / NFPA 70 EJEMPLO DE ANTENA A TIERRA SEGN EL CDIGO Antena de tierra de Exteriores Si una antena exterior o sistema de cable est conectado a la unidad, asegrese de que el sistema de antena o cable este conectado a tierra para proporcionar cierta proteccin contra subidas de tensin y las cargas estticas, la Seccin 810 del Cdigo Elctrico Nacional, ofrece ANSI / NFPA 70, informacin con respecto a tierra adecuada del mstil y la estructura de soporte, del cable de entrada a una unidad de descarga de antena, tamao de los conductores, ubicacin de la unidad de descarga, conexin a electrodos de tierra y requisitos para la toma de tierra. Agua y humedad - No utilice este producto cerca del agua
- por ejemplo, cerca de una baera, lavabo, fregadero de cocina o lavadora, en un stano hmedo o cerca de una piscina, y etc. Si usa el televisor afuera , por favor asegrese de que est protegido contra la humedad (lluvia, salpicaduras de agua). Nunca se exponga a la humedad. ABRAZADERAS DE TIERRA SISTEMA DE ELECTRODO DE TIERRA DE SERVICIO DE ALIMENTACIN (NEC ART 250) UNIDAD DE DESCARGA DE ANTENA (Seccin 810-20 del NEC) CONDUCTORES DE TIERRA
(Seccin 810-21 del NEC) CABLE DE ALAMBRE DE ANTENA NEC-CDIGO ELCTRICO NACIONAL EQUIPO DE SERVICIO ELCTRICO ABRAZADERAS DE TIERRA Soporte - No coloque el producto en un carrito, soporte, trpode o mesa. La colocacin del producto en una base inestable puede hacer que el producto se caiga, resultando en lesiones personales graves, as como daos en el producto. Utilice solamente un carrito, estante, trpode, soporte o mesa recomendada por el fabricante o vendido con el producto. Cuando monta el producto en una pared, asegrese de seguir las instrucciones del fabricante. Utilice solamente los accesorios de montaje recomendados por el fabricante. Seleccin de la ubicacin - Seleccione un lugar sin luz directa del sol y con buena ventilacin. Ventilacin - Los orificios de ventilacin y otras aberturas de la carcasa estn diseadas para la ventilacin. No cubra ni bloquee estos orificios de ventilacin y aberturas porque la falta de ventilacin puede causar sobrecalentamiento y / o acortar la vida til del producto. No coloque el producto sobre una cama, sof, alfombra u otra superficie similar, ya que pueden bloquear las aberturas de ventilacin. Este producto no est diseado para la instalacin incorporada, no coloque el producto en un lugar cerrado, como una librera o estante, a menos que exista una ventilacin adecuada o bajo las instrucciones del fabricante. El panel frontal que se utiliza en este producto es de vidrio. Por lo tanto, se puede romper cuando el producto se cae o se aplica con el impacto. Tenga cuidado de no ser heridos por pedazos de vidrio rotos en caso de la rotura del panel. Calor - El producto debe ser situado lejos de fuentes de calor como radiadores, calefactores, estufas u otros productos (incluyendo amplificadores) que produzcan calor. El panel de cristal lquido es un producto de muy alta tecnologa con millones de pxeles, que le da detalles de imagen finos. Ocasionalmente, unos pocos pxeles no activos pueden aparecer en la pantalla como un punto fijo de color azul, verde o rojo. Tenga en cuenta que esto no afecta el rendimiento de su producto. Rayos - Para la proteccin adicional de este equipo de televisor durante una tormenta elctrica, o cuando se deja sin atencin y sin usar por largos periodos de tiempo, desenchfelo de la toma de corriente y desconecte la antena. Esto evitar daos al equipo debido a rayos y subidas de tensin. Lneas elctricas Un sistema de antena exterior no debe estar situado en las proximidades de lneas elctricas areas u otra luz elctrica o circuitos elctricos de alimentacin, o donde pueda caer sobre lneas o circuitos. Al instalar un sistema de antena exterior, acente las precauciones para evitar tocar las lneas o circuitos de energa, ya que el contacto con ellos podra ser fatal. Para evitar incendios, no coloque nunca ningn tipo de vela o llama en la parte superior o cerca del televisor. Para evitar el riesgo de incendios o descargas elctricas, no coloque el cable de CA bajo el televisor u otros objetos pesados. No muestre una imagen fija durante mucho tiempo, ya que esto podra causar que una imagen residual permanezca. Para evitar incendios o descargas elctricas, el aparato no debe exponerse a goteos ni salpicaduras y ningn objeto con lquido, como jarrones, evitando colocarlos sobre el aparato. No inserte objetos extraos en el producto. La insercin de objetos en los orificios de ventilacin u otras aberturas puede provocar un incendio o una descarga elctrica. Tenga cuidado especial al utilizar el producto cerca de los nios. 4 Precauciones al transportar el televisor Cuando transporte el televisor, no lo lleve manteniendo o de otra manera ejerciendo presin sobre la pantalla. Asegrese de llevar siempre el televisor por dos personas que lo tomarn con ambas manos. Cuidado del gabinete Use un pao suave (algodn, franela, etc.) y limpie suavemente la superficie del gabinete. Con un pao qumico (hmeda / seca de tipo hoja de tela, etc.) puede deformar los componentes del gabinete de la unidad principal o causar grietas. Limpiar con un pao duro o utilizando la fuerza fuerte puede rayar la superficie del gabinete. Si el gabinete est muy sucio, lmpielo con un pao suave (algodn, franela, etc.) remojado en detergente neutral diluido en agua y bien escurrido, y luego limpie con un pao suave y seco. Evite el uso de benceno, disolvente, y otros solventes, ya que pueden deformar el gabinete y causar que la pintura se desprenda. No aplique insecticidas u otros lquidos voltiles. Adems, no permita que el gabinete permanezca en contacto con productos de caucho o vinilo durante un largo perodo de tiempo. Los plastificantes dentro del plstico pueden causar que el gabinete se deforme y causar que la pintura se desprenda. Cuidado del panel frontal Apague la alimentacin principal y desconecte el cable de CA de la toma de corriente antes de manipular. Limpie suavemente la superficie del panel frontal con un pao suave (algodn, franela, etc.). Para proteger el panel frontal, no use un pao sucio, limpiadores lquidos, o con un pao qumico (hmeda / seca de tipo hoja de tela, etc.). Esto puede daar la superficie del panel frontal. Limpiar con un pao duro o utilizando la fuerza fuerte puede rayar la superficie del panel frontal. Use un pao suave y hmedo para limpiar suavemente el panel frontal cuando est muy sucio. (Se puede rayar la superficie del panel frontal cuando se limpi con fuerza.) Si el panel frontal tiene polvo, utilice un cepillo antiesttico, que est disponible comercialmente, para limpiarlo. Para evitar rayar el marco o la pantalla, utilice un pao suave y sin pelusa para la limpieza. Paos de limpieza aprobados estn disponibles directamente desde Sharp paquete individual (00Z-LCD-CLOTH) o paquete triple
(00Z-LCD-CLOTH-3). Llame al 1-800-BE-SHARP para ordenar, o VISITE http://www.sharpusa.com/SharpDirect. Desconexin del dispositivo donde el enchufe de alimentacin o un acoplador del aparato se usa como dispositivo de desconexin, el dispositivo de desconexin debe estar siempre disponible. AVISO Nunca coloque un televisor en una ubicacin inestable. El aparato se puede caer, causando lesiones personales serias o hasta la muerte. Se pueden evitar muchas lesiones, en particular a nios, si se toman precauciones tales como:
El uso de gabinetes o bases recomendadas por el fabricante del televisor. Solo utilice muebles que puedan soportar el televisor de forma segura. Asegrese de que el televisor no est sobresaliendo por encima del borde del mueble que lo soporta. No coloque el televisor sobre un mueble alto (por ejemplo, armarios o bibliotecas) sin anclar tanto el mueble como el televisor a un soporte adecuado. No coloque el televisor sobre tela u otros materiales que puedan estar colocados entre el televisor y el mueble que lo soporta. Eduque a los nios acerca de los peligros de treparse sobre el mueble para alcanzar el televisor o sus controles. Si se retiene el mismo televisor y se lo reubica, se deben aplicar las mismas observaciones. Compre e instale dispositivos de anclaje de bajo costo (sic) para evitar que los televisores, los aparadores, las bibliotecas u otro tipo de mueble se inclinen. 5 SEGURIDAD DE LOS NIOS:
CUESTIONES DE COLOCACION DE TELEVISOR ADECUADA LA ATENCIN DE LA INDUSTRIA DE LA ELECTRNICA DE CONSUMO Los fabricantes, minoristas y el resto de la industria de la electrnica de consumo se han comprometido a hacer de entretenimiento del hogar seguro y agradable. Mientras disfruta de su televisor, tenga en cuenta que todos los televisores - nuevo y viejos- deben ser apoyados en bases adecuadas o instalados segn las recomendaciones del fabricante. Los televisores que estn mal colocados en estanteras, libreras, estantes, escritorios, altavoces, bales, carritos, etc., pueden caerse y provocar lesiones. LA SEGURIDAD PRIMERO SIEMPRE siga las recomendaciones del fabricante para la instalacin segura de su televisor. coloca el televisor. SIEMPRE lea y siga todas las instrucciones para el uso adecuado de su televisor. NUNCA permita que los nios suban o jueguen en el televisor o los muebles donde se NUNCA coloque el televisor sobre muebles que pueden utilizarse fcilmente como escalones, como un mueble con cajones. SIEMPRE instale el televisor donde no pueda ser empujado, volcado o golpeado abajo. SIEMPRE mantenga los cordones de ruta y los cables conectados al televisor para que no se pueda ser tropezados, jalados o agarrados. PARED O TECHO DONDE MONTA SU TELEVISOR SIEMPRE mantenga en contacto con su distribuidor acerca de la instalacin profesional si tiene alguna duda en montar de forma segura su televisor. SIEMPRE usar un montaje que ha sido recomendado por el fabricante del televisor y tiene una certificacin de seguridad por un laboratorio independiente (como UL, CSA, ETL). SIEMPRE siga todas las instrucciones suministradas por el fabricante del televisor y montaje. SIEMPRE asegrese de que la pared o el techo, donde va a montar el televisor es apropiado. Unos soportes no estn diseados para la instalacin en paredes y techos con vigas de acero o estructuras cilndricas. Si no est seguro, pngase en contacto con un instalador profesional. Los televisores pueden ser pesados. Se requiere un mnimo de dos personas para la instalacin del montaje en una pared o en el techo. MOVER UN TELEVISOR USADO A UN NUEVO LUGAR EN SU CASA Muchos de los nuevos compradores de televisor mueven sus televisores CRT ms antiguos en una sala secundaria despus de la compra de un televisor de pantalla plana. Se debe hacer especial cuidado en la colocacin de los televisores CRT ms antiguos. SIEMPRE coloque su televisor CRT ms antiguo en el mueble que es resistente y adecuado para su tamao y peso. NUNCA coloque su televisor CRT ms antiguo en un cajonero donde los nios pueden tener la tentacin de utilizar los cajones para subir. SIEMPRE asegrese de que su televisor CRT ms antiguo no cuelgue sobre el borde de sus muebles. CE.org/seguridad 6 Warranty for USA LIMITED WARRANTY FOR SHARPTM, AQUOSTM AND QUATTRONTM TVs Congratulations on your purchase!
IMPORTANT: Just in case your newly purchased TV needs to be serviced, please keep the original packaging materials and original receipt. Hisense USA Corporation (Hisense, We, Us or Our), under its one or more licenses from Sharp Corporation, hereby warrants to the first end user consumer purchaser (Purchaser) for this SharpTM, AquosTM or QuattronTM television (Product), when shipped in its original container and sold or distributed in the United States and Puerto Rico by our authorized dealer, and provided that this Product was not sold either as is, with all faults, sales final or per similar terms, that this Product will, during the applicable warranty period as stated solely in this Limited Warranty, be free from defects in material and workmanship. We will, solely within the applicable warranty period and at our sole discretion, either repair the defective Product or provide the Purchaser with a like new or refurbished product of similar or better quality. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
Warranty service may be obtained by contacting us using any of the methods below. Proof of purchase in the form of an original bill of sale or receipted invoice that evidences the Product is within the applicable warranty period must be presented to us in order to obtain warranty service. Our contact information is provided below. Warranty Service and Troubleshooting Information for Customers in the United States and Puerto Rico To obtain warranty service and troubleshooting information, contact Consumer Electronics Care Center. Call 1-888-935-8880 (MondayFriday from 9 a.m. - 9 p.m. EST, SaturdaySunday from 9 a.m. - 6 p.m.) or Email support@sharptvusa.com or visit our website www.sharptvusa.com. ON-SITE SERVICE:
Certain Products are eligible for on-site service at our sole discretion. On-site service requires that our authorized service provider be given clear, complete, unobstructed and easy access to the Product. On-site service does not include that the service provider removes, reinstalls or transports the Product. It is possible that certain on-site repairs will need to be completed off site, and at our discretion, require that the Product to be shipped directly to our warehouse. Once we receive the Product and repair or replace it we will return the repaired/replaced Product back to the Purchaser. TERMS AND CONDITIONS:
This limited warranty shall not apply to:
(a) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of: abusive operation; misuse; negligence; accident; shipment damages; improper delivery and installation; application and use for which this Product was not intended as set forth in the users manual or other applicable Product documentation.
(b) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of any Product that has been tampered with, modified, adjusted or repaired by any person other than us, our authorized service provider or our authorized service center or dealer.
(c) Any replacement of accessories, glassware, consumable or peripheral items required through normal use of the Product, including but not limited to, earphones, remote controls, batteries, etc.
(d) Any cosmetic damage to the Product surface or exterior, including but not limited to that which has been defaced or caused through normal wear and tear, improper shipping and handling or the use of chemical cleaning agents.
(e) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of damage caused by any external or environmental conditions, including but not limited to, use of incorrect voltage, fluctuations or surges in transmission line/power line voltage, liquid spillage, or acts of nature or of God.
(f) Warranty claims for Products returned with altered, illegible or missing model, factory serial number and UL markings. Warranty for USA
(g) Any Products used for rental, business or commercial purposes.
(h) Any installation, consumer instruction, delivery, setup, adjustment, and/or programming charges.
(i) A Product that is not installed in accordance with installation instructions included with the Product.
(j) Any signal reception problems (including antenna related problems), images burnt into the screen, signal noise or echo, interference or other signal transmission or delivery problems, availability of third-party provided services or content (including, without limitation, image, audio or video content). No other entity is authorized to extend, enlarge or transfer this warranty on behalf of us. The express warranties in this limited warranty are in lieu of and, except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, we disclaim all other warranties and conditions, express or implied, whether arising by law, statute, by course of dealing or usage of trade, including, without limitation, implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and/or quality, fitness for a particular use or purpose, and/or non-infringement. Limitations: (a) We shall not be liable for any incidental, special, consequential, economic, exemplary or indirect damages of any kind or nature (including lost profits or damages for loss of time or loss of use or loss of data) arising from or in any connection with the use or performance of a Product or a failure of a Product, even if we are aware of or have been advised of the possibility of such damages; (b) the remedies described in this limited warranty constitute complete fulfillment of all our obligations and responsibilities to the Purchaser with respect to the Product and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based in contract, negligence, strict liability or otherwise. Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. WARRANTY PERIODS:
All warranty periods shall be calculated from the date of original purchase by the Purchaser. LCD/LED TV: 1 year for parts and labor (replacement Product and parts assume the remaining original warranty period, or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer). Remote Control: 90 days for parts and labor This Warranty is only valid in the United States and Puerto Rico and only applies to Products sold/distributed and serviced in the United States and Puerto Rico. NO WARRANTIES (WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL APPLY AFTER THE EXPRESS WARRANTY PERIOD STATED ABOVE, AND NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY GIVEN
(BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT) SHALL BE BINDING ON HISENSE. THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT AND HISENSE IS THE EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY PROVIDER FOR THE PRODUCT. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER. HISENSE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, CONSUMERS RECOVERY AGAINST HISENSE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT SOLD BY HISENSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL END USER CONSUMER PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT AND IS NOT TRANSFERABLE. Some States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or allow limitations on warranties; therefore, the limitations or exclusions stated above may not apply to Purchaser, solely within those specific States. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights which vary from State to State. This warranty applies to the maximum extent not prohibited by law. CUSTOMER RECORD Please fill and retain for your records, along with proof of original purchase. You do not need to send us this warranty card to receive warranty service. Date of Purchase: ............................................................. Store/Dealer: ............................................................................. Model No.: ......................................................................... Serial No.: ................................................................................. Warranty for Canada LIMITED WARRANTY 45 inch and below Carry-In warranty Above 45 inch In-Home service Congratulations on your purchase!
Hisense Canada Co. Ltd (Hisense) warrants to the first purchaser for this Sharp brand (Product), when shipped in its original packaging and sold or distributed in Canada by Hisense or by an authorized Hisense dealer, and product was not sold as is or sales final that the Product will during the applicable warranty period, be free from defects in material and workmanship, and will within the applicable warranty period, either repair the defective Product or provide the first purchaser a replacement of the defective Product with a new or like refurbished product of similar or better quality. Warranty period and conditions:
One-year part and labour. Warranty limited to product purchased from Authorized dealer in Canada only. The limited warranty Conditions: This limited warranty shall not apply to:
(a) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of abusive operation, negligence, accident, improper installation or inappropriate use as outlined in the owners manual or other applicable Product documentation.
(b) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of any Product that has been tampered with, modified, adjusted or repaired by any person other than Hisense authorized service centre or a Hisense authorized servicing dealer.
(c) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of the use of the Product with items not specified or approved by Hisense, including but not limited to and chemical cleaning agents.
(d) Any replacement of accessories, glassware, consumable or peripheral items required through normal use of the Product, including but not limited to, earphones, remote controls, AC adapters, batteries.
(e) Any cosmetic damage to the Product surface and exterior that has been defaced or caused by normal wear and tear.
(f) Any defects caused or repairs required as a result of damage caused by any external or environmental conditions, including but not limited to, transmission line/power line voltage or liquid spillage or acts of God.
(g) Warranty claims for Products returned with illegible or without appropriate model, serial number and CSA/cUL markings.
(h) Any Products used for rental or commercial purposes.
(i) Any installation, delivery, setup and/or programming charges.
(j) The removal and reinstallation of wall mounted Product for service purposes which is the responsibility of the owner.
(k) Up to three (3) pixel failures (dots that are dark or incorrectly illuminated)grouped in an area smaller that one tenth(1/10) of the display size or upto five pixels failure throughout the display.(pixel based displays may contain a limited number of pixels that may not function normally. How to get service: Warranty service may be obtained upon delivery of the Product, together with the proof of purchase
(including date of purchase) and a copy of this limited warranty statement, to an authorized Hisense service centre or an authorized Hisense servicing dealer. In home warranty service will be carried out to locations accessible by on-
road service vehicle and within 50 km of an authorized Hisense service centre or any Sharp Television with the screen size above 45 or larger. The servicer may if necessary take the unit for repair at the servicers facility. No other person
(including any Hisense dealer or service centre) is authorized to extend, enlarge or transfer this warranty on behalf of Sharp Product. The purchaser will be responsible for any and all removal, reinstallation. The express warranties in this limited warranty are, except for consumer purchasers domiciled in Quebec, in lieu of and, except to the extent prohibited by applicable law, Hisense disclaims all other warranties and conditions, express or implied, whether arising by law, statute, by course of dealing or usage of trade, including, without limitation, implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and/or quality, fitness for a particular use or purpose, and/or non-infringement. Limitations (not applicable to consumer purchasers domiciled in Quebec to the extend prohibited under Quebec law):
(a) Hisense Canada Co Ltd. shall not be liable for any incidental, special, consequential, economic, exemplary or indirect damages of any kind or nature (including lost profits or damages for loss of time or loss of use or loss of data) arising from or in any connection with the use or performance of a Product or a failure of a Product, even if Hisense is Warranty for Canada aware of or has been advised of the possibility of such damages: (b) the remedies described in this limited warranty constitute complete fulfillment of all obligations and responsibilities of Hisense Canada to the purchaser with respect to the Product and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based on contract, negligence, strict liability or otherwise. Some provinces may not allow the exclusion or limitation of certain damages, or limits on the duration or voiding of implied warranties or conditions; in such provinces, the exclusion or limitation of certain damages, or limits on the duration or voiding of implied warranties or conditions; in such provinces, the exclusions and limits herein may not apply. This limited warranty is, except for consumer purchases domiciled in Quebec, governed by laws of the Province in Canada in which the purchaser has purchased the Product. For consumer purchasers domiciled in Quebec this limited warranty is governed by the laws of Quebec. To obtain the name and address of the nearest Authorized Hisense (Sharp) Service Centre or Dealer, or for more information on this limited Warranty Offers, Hisense Canada (Sharp)Products or Accessory Sales, please contact Hisense Canada Co Ltd. By writing to Hisense Co. Ltd Canada at 405 Britannia Rad East unit # 11&12, Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 1W9 Customer Support Phone 1-855-271-6271 (Monday-Friday from 8.00am to 8.00pm) Customer support email: canadasupport@sharp-canada.ca Visiting our Web site: sharp-canada.ca CUSTOMER RECORD (Please retain for your records) Date of Purchase: .................................................................... Store/Dealer: ........................................................................... Model No.: ............................................................................... Serial Number: ......................................................................... Garantie pour le Canada GARANTIE LIMITEE Garantie en atelier pour modles de 45 pouces et moins Service Domicile pour modles plus de 45 pouces Flicitations pour votre achat !
Hisense Canada Co. Ltd ("Hisense"), garantit l'acheteur de ce produit de marque Sharp (dnomms comme Produit dans ce document), que lors de lexpdition dans son emballage original et vendu ou distribu au Canada par Hisense, ou par un concessionnaire Hisense autoris, et condition que ce produit n'a pas t vendu, soit tel quell, ventes finales, ce Produit, au cours de la priode de la garantie applicable, est exempt de dfauts matriels et de fabrication, et pendant la priode de garantie applicable, Hisense va, soit rparer le produit dfectueux soit fournir au premier acheteur un produit remis de qualit gale ou suprieure. Dure et conditions de la garantie:
Un an de garantie sur la main-d'uvre. Garantie limite uniquement au produit achet au vendeur autoris au Canada. La garantie limite Conditions : la garantie limite sera inapplicable :
(a) Toute dfectuosit ou rparations ncessaires la suite d'un usage abusif, une ngligence, un accident, une mauvaise installation ou un usage inappropri comme dcrit dans le manuel dutilisateur ou dautres documentations applicables de Produit.
(b) Toute dfectuosit ou rparations ncessaires la suite de tout le Produit qui a t altr, modifi, rgl ou rpar par une personne autre quun fournisseur de services autoris de Hisense ou un centre ou revendeur autoris de service de Hisense.
(c) Toute dfectuosit ou rparations ncessaires la suite de l'utilisation du Produit avec des articles non expressment dsigns ou approuvs par Hisense, y compris mais sans s'y limiter des agents de nettoyage chimiques.
(d) Tout remplacement d'accessoires, verrerie, articles consommables ou priphriques ncessaires une utilisation normale du Produit, y compris mais non limit , couteurs, tlcommandes, adaptateurs dalimentation, piles.
(e) Toute dfectuosit cosmtique la surface ou l'extrieur du Produit qui a t dfigur ou causs par l'usage normale.
(f ) Toute dfectuosit ou rparations ncessaires rsultant des dommages causs par des conditions externes ou environnementales, incluant, mais non limits , la tension lectrique de la ligne de transmission/dalimentation ou le dversement de liquide ou actes de Dieu.
(g) La garantie rclamer contre les Produits retourns avec un numro de modle appropri ou illisible, ni le numro de srie ou ni le marquage CSA / cUL.
(h) Tout Produit utilis des fins commerciales ou de location.
( i ) Tout charge de linstallation, du livraison, de la configuration, et / ou de la programmation.
(J) La dsinstallation et la rinstallation du Produit mont au mur des fins de service, ce qui est la responsabilit du propritaire.
(k) Jusqu' trois (3) checs de pixels (points qui sont noirs ou incorrectement allums) groups dans une zone plus petite quun dixime (1/10) de la taille d'affichage ou jusqu lchec de cinq pixels travers l'cran. (Pixel sur la base affiche peut contenir un nombre limit de pixels qui peuvent ne pas fonctionner normalement. Comment obtenir un service : Le service de garantie peut tre obtenue la livraison du produit, ainsi que la preuve d'achat d'origine (y compris la date d'achat) et une copie de cette garantie limite un fournisseur de services Hisense agr ou un centre ou un revendeur agr de service Hisense. La garantie de service domicile sera effectue dans les rgions accessibles par vhicule de service sur la route et moins de 50 km d'un centre de service Hisense autoris ou tous les tlviseurs Sharp avec la taille de l'cran au-dessus de 45 "ou plus. Le rparateur peut, si ncessaire, prendre l'unit pour la rparation l'installation de l'agent serveur. Aucune autre personne (y compris un courtier Hisense ou centre de service) nest autorise prolonger, tendre ou transfrer la prsente garantie au nom de Sharp Produit. L'acheteur sera responsable de toute la dsinstallation et la rinstallation. Les garanties explicites de la prsente garantie limite remplacent et Hisense dcline, sauf pour les consommateurs-
Garantie pour le Canada acheteurs domicilis au Qubec et lexception des cas o la loi en vigueur linterdit, toutes les autres garanties et conditions, explicites ou implicites, quelles apparaissent ou non par la loi, par le rglement, par les cours de vente ou les usages du commerce, y compris, sans limitation, les garanties ou conditions de qualit marchande et / ou de la qualit, d'adquation un usage particulier ou un but, et / ou de non violation.gLimitations: (ne s'applique pas aux acheteurs domicilis Qubec la consommation au prolongement interdit en vertu de la loi du Qubec) (a) Hisense Canada Co. Ltd. ne doit pas tre tenus responsables des dommages fortuits, spciaux, indirects, conomiques, exemplaires ou indirects de quelque nature que ce soit (y compris les profits perdus ou dommages-intrts pour perte de temps ou perte d'utilisation ou de perte de donnes) rsultant de ou dans toute relation avec l'utilisation ou la performance d'un produit ou d'une dfaillance d'un produit, mme si Hisense est au courant ou a t avis de la possibilit de tels dommages; (b) les remdes dcrits dans cette garantie limite constituent l'excution intgrale de toutes les obligations et les responsabilits de Hisense Canada l'acheteur l'gard du produit et constituera un acquittement complet de toutes les demandes, que ce soit fonde sur un contrat, de ngligence, de responsabilit stricte ou autrement. Certaines provinces ne permettent pas l'exclusion ou la limitation de certains dommages, ou des limites la dure ou de la nullit des garanties ou des conditions implicites; dans ces tats, les exclusions et les limites dans ce document ne peuvent pas appliquer. Cette garantie est, sauf pour les achats des consommateurs domicilis Qubec, rgis par les lois de la province au canada dans laquelle l'acheteur a achet le produit. Pour les acheteurs domicilis Qubec, cette garantie est rgie par les lois du qubec. Pour obtenir le nom et l'adresse du plus proche Centre de service ou Revendeur autoris de Hisense (Sharp), ou pour plus d'informations sur cette garantie limite, Produits de Hisense Canada (Sharp) ou ventes des accessoires, contacter Hisense Canada Co. Ltd. En crivant Hisense Co. Ltd Canada 405 Britannia Rad Est unit # 11&12, Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 1W9 Tlphone de Soutien la clientle 1-855-271-6271 (du lundi au vendredi 8h00-20h00) Email de Soutien la clientle : canadasupport@sharp-canada.ca En visitant notre Website : sharp-canada.ca FICHE CLIENT (Conservez dans vos dossiers) Date dAchat: ........................................................................... Magasin/Dtaillant: .................................................................. Numro de Modle: ................................................................. Numro de srie: ..................................................................... Garanta para Mxico Pliza de garanta limitada para equipos Sharp Esta garanta limitada es aplicable solamente a productos de la marca SHARP, comercializados por Hisense Mxico S. de R. L. de C. V. y por sus distribuidores nacionales autorizados. Hisense Mxico S. de R. L. de C.V. garantiza el funcionamiento de sus equipos, respecto de todas sus piezas, componentes y accesorios como los son el control remoto, base/soporte, cable de alimentacin, por el periodo descrito en la tabla de garanta siguiente a partir de la fecha de la compra que aparezca en el recibo, factura o pliza de garanta debidamente llenada y sellada por el distribuidor autorizado, contra cualquier defecto de fabricacin que se observe. Tabla de Garanta:
Tipo de Pantalla Modelos con funcin 4K Garanta de Pantalla 2 aos TV Bsicas y Modelos smart 2 aos Accesorios 3 meses La garanta incluir la mano de obra as como los gastos de transportacin del producto dentro de la red de servicio, bajo las siguientes:
Condiciones:
El servicio de garanta slo podr ser efectuado por nuestros Centros de Servicio Autorizados, siempre y cuando los productos Hisense hayan sido comercializados por Hisense Mxico S. de R. L. de C.V., as como sus distribuidores autorizados dentro de la Repblica Mexicana. Para hacer efectiva la garanta se deber presentar el producto y esta pliza debidamente llenada y sellada con la fecha de entrega por el establecimiento donde se realiz la compra o el comprobante de compra, es decir el recibo o factura del producto en cualquiera de nuestros Centros de Servicio Autorizados en la Repblica Mexicana. En estos Centros se podrn adquirir refacciones y/o accesorios de este producto. Durante la vigencia de esta garanta, Hisense Mxico S. de R. L. de C.V. se compromete a reparar y proveer las refacciones y la mano de obra que se requieran sin ningn cargo para el consumidor, o en su defecto, cambiar el producto por otro igual o de caractersticas similares, siempre y cuando el producto presente fallas imputables a la fabricacin del mismo y/o del sistema operativo original del equipo. El producto deber ser reparado o cambiado, por nuestro personal tcnico; en un plazo no mayor a 30 (treinta) das en caso de encontrarse dentro del plazo de garanta establecido en esta pliza. Para atencin al consumidor y para recibir informacin de esta garanta en la Repblica Mexicana llame sin costo al telfono:
01-800-999-7277 (SHARPs line) Esta garanta limitada no ser vlida en los siguientes casos:
a) Cuando el producto se hubiese utilizado en condiciones distintas a las normales. b) Cuando el producto no hubiese sido operado de acuerdo con el instructivo de uso que se le acompaa. c) Cuando el producto hubiese sido alterado o reparado por personas no autorizadas por el fabricante nacional, importador o comercializador responsable respectivo. Reparaciones o reemplazo tal y como se establece en esta garanta constituyen el nico medio de cumplimiento de la misma adems de las previsiones que la ley federal del consumidor provee. Hisense no ser responsable de cualquier dao incidental o consecuencia, por razones de no cumplir con esta garanta exceptuando las que la ley disponga para tal efecto. Lugar de compra:________________________________________________________________ Modelo:________________________________ Producto:______________________________ Marca:_________________________________ No. de Serie:______________________________ Sello del establecimiento Fecha de compra:________________________________ Garanta para Mxico Centros de servicio y suministro de consumibles. AEP Technology S.A de C.V Calzada Heroica Escuela Naval Militar N754 Plaza Premier Int. 14 y 15 Col. Ex-Hacienda de Coapa Delegacin Coyoacn, CP 04800 Importado por:
Hisense Mxico S. de R. L. de C. V. Cervantes Saavedra, No. 301, Torre Norte Piso 2 Col. Ampliacin Granada C.P. 11520 Delegacin Miguel Hidalgo D.F. Tel: 01-800-999-7277 (SHARPs line) Garanta para Centro Amrica Pliza de garanta limitada para pantallas Sharp-Hisense Esta garanta limitada es aplicable solamente a productos de la marca Sharp-Hisense, por el periodo de 1 ao a partir de la fecha de la compra que aparezca en el ticket y/o factura, contra cualquier defecto de fabricacin que se observe. La garanta incluir la mano de obra as como los gastos de transportacin del producto dentro de la red de servicio, bajo las siguientes:
Condiciones:
El servicio de garanta slo podr ser efectuado por nuestros Centros de Servicio Autorizado, siempre y cuando los productos Sharp-Hisense hayan sido comercializados por Sharp-Hisense as como sus distribuidores autorizados en los pases que sea comercializado el producto por un distribuidor directo de Sharp-Hisense y donde Sharp-Hisense tiene oficinas regionales tales como Mxico y Panam. Para hacer efectiva la garanta se deber presentar el producto y esta pliza debidamente llenada y sellada con la fecha de entrega por el establecimiento donde se realiz la compra o el comprobante de compra, es decir el ticket y/o factura del producto en cualquiera de nuestros Centros de Servicio Autorizados. Durante la vigencia de esta garanta (1 ao en equipo), Sharp-Hisense se compromete a reparar y proveer las refacciones y la mano de obra que se requieran sin ningn cargo para el consumidor, o en su defecto, cambiar el producto por otro igual o de caractersticas similares, siempre y cuando el producto presente fallas imputables a la fabricacin del mismo y/o del sistema operativo original del equipo. El producto deber ser reparado o cambiado, por nuestro personal tcnico, en un plazo no mayor a 30 (treinta) das en caso de encontrarse dentro del plazo de garanta establecido en esta pliza. Esta garanta limitada no ser vlida en los siguientes casos:
a) Cuando el producto se hubiese utilizado en condiciones distintas a las normales, es decir, cuando presente daos por negligencia o accidente del usuario, como golpes, rupturas del producto, substancias o componentes ajenas en su interior b) Daos ocasionados por desastres naturales, inundaciones;
c) Daos causados por insectos animales dentro de los artculos, virus d) Artculos que se devuelvan (en caso que aplique) sin accesorios completos e) Pilas, cables elctricos, partes plsticas, control remoto, conexiones externas. f) Daos por fluctuaciones de voltaje, descargas elctricas, incendios o accidentes g) Cuanto el producto no hubiese sido operado de acuerdo con el instructivo de uso que se acompaa y h) Cuando el producto hubiese sido alterado o reparado por personas no autorizadas por Sharp-Hisense i) Daos a la tonalidad o brillo del panel por el uso del mismo con por imgenes fijas. j) Golpe evidente en el rea de cristal o cualquier parte expuesta a contacto fsico por parte del cliente. k) Si el panel solo presenta 11 pixeles o menos con algn comportamiento anormal (pixeles muertos, encendidos) sin dao por golpe visible. Reparaciones o reemplazo tal y como se establece en esta garanta, constituyen el nico medio de cumplimiento de la misma a favor del consumidor. Sharp-Hisense no ser responsable de cualquier dao incidental o consecuencia, por razones de no cumplir con esta garanta. Lugar de compra:________________________________________________________________ Modelo:________________________________ Producto:______________________________ Marca:_________________________________ No. de Serie:______________________________ Sello del establecimiento Fecha de compra:________________________________ Garanta para Centro Amrica Centros de servicio por pas:
800 5061 1117 800 5051 0533 800 5071 1468 800 1651 0384
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-10-21 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2016-10-21
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Hisense Electric Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0018627976
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
No. 218 Qianwangang Road, Economy & Technology Dev
|
||||
1 |
Qingdao, N/A
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
W9H
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
LCDF0093
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
S**** S******
|
||||
1 | Title |
Certificate Director
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
86-53********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
86-53********
|
||||
1 |
s******@hisense.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Audix Technology ( Shanghai ) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
B****** K******
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
3F #34 Bldg. No. 680 Gui Ping Rd. Caohejing Hi-Tec
|
||||
1 |
Shanghai, 200233
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
021-6******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
021-6********
|
||||
1 |
b******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Audix Technology ( Shanghai ) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
A**** H********
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
3F #34 Bldg. No. 680 Gui Ping Rd. Caohejing Hi-Tec
|
||||
1 |
Shanghai, 200233
|
|||||
1 |
China
|
|||||
1 | Telephone Number |
021-6******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
021-6********
|
||||
1 |
a******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | LED LCD TV | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Maximum Resolution: 3840*2160@60Hz | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Audix Technology ( Shanghai ) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 | Name |
B******** K********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
021-6********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
021-6********
|
||||
1 |
b******@audix.com.cn
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 19 20 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC